KMM-BT305

KMM-BT205
DIGITAL MEDIA RECEIVER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

© 2018 JVC KENWOOD Corporation B5A-2602-20 (MN)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_C20.indd 1 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/3/2021 4:50:17 PM

Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
CONTENTS BEFORE USE
BEFORE USE 2 IMPORTANT
BASICS 3 • To ensure proper use, please read through this manual before using this product. It is especially important that you read and observe Warnings
and Cautions in this manual.
GETTING STARTED 4 • Please keep the manual in a safe and accessible place for future reference.
1 Select the display language
and cancel the demonstration WARNING
2 Set the clock and date • Do not operate any function that takes your attention away from safe driving.
3 Set the initial settings • Do not ingest the battery, Chemical Burn Hazard.
The remote control supplied with this product contains a coin/button cell battery.
RADIO 6 If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
AUX 7 If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children.
USB/iPod/ANDROID 8 If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.
Spotify 10 Caution
Volume setting:
BLUETOOTH® 12 • Adjust the volume so that you can hear sounds outside the car to prevent accidents.
AUDIO SETTINGS 19 • Lower the volume before playing digital sources to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
DISPLAY SETTINGS 23 General:
• Avoid using the external device if it might hinder safe driving.
REFERENCES 25 • Make sure all important data has been backed up. We shall bear no responsibility for any loss of recorded data.
Maintenance • Never put or leave any metallic objects (such as coins or metal tools) inside the unit to prevent a short circuit.
More information • USB rating is indicated on the main unit. To view, detach the faceplate. (Page 3)
• Depending on the types of cars, the antenna will automatically extend when you turn on the unit with the antenna control wire connected
TROUBLESHOOTING 27
(page 32). Turn off the unit or change the source to STANDBY when parking at a low ceiling area.
INSTALLATION/ Remote control (RC-406):
CONNECTION 30 • Do not leave the remote control in hot places such as on the dashboard.
SPECIFICATIONS 33 • The Lithium battery is in danger of explosion if replaced incorrectly. Replace it only with the same or equivalent type.
• The battery pack or batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

How to read this manual

• Operations are explained mainly using buttons on the faceplate of .
• English indications are used for the purpose of explanation. You can select the display language from the [FUNCTION] menu. (Page 5)
• [XX] indicates the selected items.
• (Page XX) indicates references are available on the stated page.

2 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 2 7/19/2018 10:16:51 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BASICS
Faceplate Remote control (RC-406) (supplied for )

Display window Remote sensor (Do not expose to bright

sunlight.)

Volume knob
: Lights
up when Bluetooth Pull out the insulation sheet when
connection is using for the first time.
established.
(Page 12)
: Can be remotely controlled with an optionally
purchased remote control.
Detach button

Attach Detach How to reset How to replace the battery

Reset the unit within

5 seconds after
detaching the faceplate.

To On the faceplate On the remote control

Turn on the power Press B SRC. Press and hold SRC to turn off the power.
• Press and hold to turn off the power. ( Pressing SRC does not turn on the power. )
Adjust the volume Turn the volume knob. Press VOL or VOL .
• Press and hold VOL to continuously increase the volume to 15.
Press ATT during playback to attenuate the sound.
• Press again to cancel.
Select a source Press B SRC repeatedly. Press SRC repeatedly.
Change the display information Press DISP repeatedly. (Page 26) ( Not available )

ENGLISH 3

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 3 7/19/2018 10:16:51 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
GETTING STARTED
4 Turn the volume knob to make the settings, then press the knob.
Hour Minute
5 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK FORMAT], then press the knob.
6 Turn the volume knob to select [12H] or [24H], then press the knob.
To set the date
7 Turn the volume knob to select [DATE FORMAT], then press the knob.
8 Turn the volume knob to select [DD/MM/YY] or [MM/DD/YY], then press
1 the knob.
Select the display language and cancel the demonstration 9 Turn the volume knob to select [DATE SET], then press the knob.
When you turn on the power for the first time (or [FACTORY RESET] is set to 10 Turn the volume knob to make the settings, then press the knob.
[YES], see page 5), the display shows: “SEL LANGUAGE” “PRESS” Day Month Year or Month Day Year
“VOLUME KNOB” 11 Press and hold to exit.
1 Turn the volume knob to select [ENG] (English) or [TUR] (Turkish), then To return to the previous setting item, press .
press the knob.
[ENG] is selected for the initial setup.
3 Set the initial settings
Then, the display shows: “CANCEL DEMO” “PRESS” “VOLUME KNOB”.
2 Press the volume knob again. 1 Press B SRC repeatedly to enter STANDBY.
[YES] is selected for the initial setup. 2 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
3 Press the volume knob again. 3 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
“DEMO OFF” appears. press the knob.
4 Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or activated.
Then, the display shows the selected crossover type: “2-WAY X ’ OVER” or
5 Press and hold to exit.
“3-WAY X ’ OVER”
• To change the crossover type, see “Change the crossover type” on To return to the previous setting item, press .
page 5.
Default: [XX]
2 Set the clock and date [AUDIO CONTROL]
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. [SWITCH PREOUT] (For : Applicable only if [X’OVER] is set to [2WAY].)
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK], then press the knob. (Page 5)
[REAR]/[SUB-W]: Selects whether rear speakers or a subwoofer are
To adjust the clock connected to the line out terminals on the rear (through an external
3 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK ADJUST], then press the knob. amplifier). (Page 33)

4 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 4 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
GETTING STARTED

[DISPLAY] [FACTORY RESET] [YES]: Resets the settings to default (except the stored station). ;
[NO]: Cancels.
[EASY MENU] (For )
When entering [FUNCTION]... [CLOCK]
[ON]: [ZONE 1] illumination changes to white color. ;
[CLOCK DISPLAY] [ON]: The clock time is shown on the display even when the unit is
[OFF]: [ZONE 1] illumination remains as [COLOR SELECT] color.
turned off. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
(Page 24)
• [ZONE 2] illumination changes to light blue color when you enter [ENGLISH] Select the display language for [FUNCTION] menu and music
[FUNCTION], irregardless of the [EASY MENU] setting. information if applicable.
• Refer to the illustration on page 23 for zone identification. [TURKCE] By default, [ENGLISH] is selected.
[TUNER SETTING]
[PRESET TYPE] [NORMAL]: Memorizes one station for each preset button in each band Change the crossover type
(FM1/FM2/FM3/AM/SW1/SW2). ; [MIX]: Memorizes one station for
each preset button, regardless of the selected band. 1 Press B SRC repeatedly to enter STANDBY.
2 Press and hold number buttons 4 and 5 to enter crossover select.
[SYSTEM]
The current crossover type appears.
[KEY BEEP] (Applicable only if [X’OVER] is set to [2WAY].) 3 Turn the volume knob to select “2WAY” or “3WAY”, then press the
[ON]: Activates the keypress tone. ; [OFF]: Deactivates. knob.
[TDF ALARM] (Applicable only if [X’OVER] is set to [2WAY].) 4 Turn the volume knob to select “YES” or “NO”, then press the knob.
[ON]: Activates the alarm if you forget to detach the faceplate when ACC is The selected crossover type appears.
set to OFF. ; [OFF]: Deactivates.
• To cancel, press and hold .
[SOURCE SELECT] • To adjust the selected crossover settings, see page 20.
[SPOTIFY SRC] [ON]: Enables SPOTIFY/SPOTIFY BT in source selection. ; [OFF]: Disables.
(Page 10) Caution:
Select a crossover type according to how the speakers are connected. (Page
[BUILT-IN AUX] [ON]: Enables AUX in source selection. ; [OFF]: Disables. (Page 7) 32, 33)
[F/W UPDATE] If you select a wrong type:
• The speakers may damage.
[UPDATE SYSTEM]
• The output sound level may be extremely high or low.
[F/W UP xxxx] [YES]: Starts upgrading the firmware. ; [NO]: Cancels (upgrading is not
activated). For details on how to update the firmware, visit
<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/>.

ENGLISH 5

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 5 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
RADIO
Other settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob.
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected/activated or follow the
instructions stated on the selected item.
• “ST” lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal 4 Press and hold to exit.
strength.
• The unit switches to FM alarm automatically when receiving an alarm To return to the previous setting item, press .
signal from FM broadcast.
Default: [XX]

Search for a station [TUNER SETTING]

[SEEK MODE] Selects the searching method for S / T buttons when pressed.
1 Press B SRC repeatedly to select RADIO. [AUTO1]: Automatically search for a station. ; [AUTO2]: Search for a preset
2 Press BAND repeatedly (or press #FM+/*AM– on the remote control) station. ; [MANUAL]: Manually search for a station.
to select FM1/FM2/FM3/AM/SW1/SW2.
3 Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on the remote control) to [LOCAL SEEK] [ON]: Searches only AM/SW1/SW2 stations with good reception. ;
search for a station. [OFF]: Cancels.
• Settings made are applicable only to the selected source/station. Once
You can store up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM/SW1/SW2. you change the source/station, you need to make the settings again.
• To store a station: Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6). [AUTO MEMORY] [YES]: Automatically starts memorizing 6 stations with good reception. ;
• To select a stored station: Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) (or [NO]: Cancels.
press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) on the remote control). • Selectable only if [NORMAL] is selected for [PRESET TYPE]. (Page 5)
[MONO SET] [ON]: Improves the FM reception, but the stereo effect will be lost. ;
Direct Access Tuning (using the remote control) [OFF]: Cancels.
1 Press DIRECT to enter Direct Access Tuning. [NEWS SET] [ON]: The unit will temporarily switch to News Programme if available. ;
2 Press the number buttons to enter a station frequency. [OFF]: Cancels.
3 Press ENT IW to search for a station. [REGIONAL] [ON]: Switches to another station only in the specific region using the “AF”
• To cancel, press or DIRECT. control. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
• If no operation is done for 10 seconds after step 2, Direct Access Tuning is [AF SET] [ON]: Automatically searches for another station broadcasting the same
automatically canceled. program in the same Radio Data System network with better reception
when the current reception is poor. ; [OFF]: Cancels.

6 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 6 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
RADIO AUX
[TI] [ON]: Allows the unit to temporarily switch to Traffic Information if Preparation:
available (“TI” lights up). ; [OFF]: Cancels. • Select [ON] for [BUILT-IN AUX] in [SOURCE SELECT]. (Page 5)

[PTY SEARCH] 1 Turn the volume knob to select the available Program Type (see below),
then press the knob. Start listening
2 Turn the volume knob to select the PTY language ([ENGLISH]/ 1 Connect a portable audio player (commercially available).
[FRENCH]/[GERMAN]), then press the knob.
3 Press S / T to start searching. Auxiliary input jack
[CLOCK] Portable audio player
[TIME SYNC] [ON]: Synchronizes the unit’s time to the Radio Data System station time. ;
[OFF]: Cancels.
• [MONO SET]/[NEWS SET]/[REGIONAL]/[AF SET]/[TI]/[PTY SEARCH] is selectable only
when the band is FM1/FM2/FM3.
• If the volume is adjusted during reception of traffic information, alarm or 3.5 mm stereo mini plug with “L” shaped
news bulletin, the adjusted volume is memorized automatically. It will be connector (commercially available)
applied the next time traffic information, alarm or news bulletin is turned
on. 2 Press B SRC repeatedly to select AUX.
3 Turn on the portable audio player and start playback.
Available Program Type for [PTY SEARCH]
[SPEECH]: [NEWS], [AFFAIRS], [INFO] (information), [SPORT], [EDUCATE], [DRAMA],
[CULTURE], [SCIENCE], [VARIED], [WEATHER], [FINANCE], [CHILDREN], Set the AUX name
[SOCIAL], [RELIGION], [PHONE IN], [TRAVEL], [LEISURE], [DOCUMENT] While listening to a portable audio player connected to the unit...
[MUSIC]: [POP M] (music), [ROCK M] (music), [EASY M] (music), [LIGHT M] 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
(music), [CLASSICS], [OTHER M] (music), [JAZZ], [COUNTRY], [NATION M] 2 Turn the volume knob to select [SYSTEM], then press the knob.
(music), [OLDIES], [FOLK M] (music) 3 Turn the volume knob to select [AUX NAME SET], then press the knob.
The unit will search for the Program Type categorized under [SPEECH] or 4 Turn the volume knob to select an item, then press the knob.
[MUSIC] if selected. [AUX] (default)/[DVD]/[PORTABLE]/[GAME]/[VIDEO]/[TV]
5 Press and hold to exit.
To return to the previous setting item, press .

ENGLISH 7

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 7 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
USB/iPod/ANDROID
Selectable source:
: USB/iPod USB/ANDROID
: USB/ANDROID

Start playback
The source changes automatically and playback starts.

USB input terminal

To On the faceplate On the remote control
USB Play back/pause Press 6 IW. Press ENT IW.
Reverse/Fast-forward*4 Press and hold S / T. Press and hold S / T (+).
CA-U1EX (max.: 500 mA) Select a file Press S / T. Press S / T (+).
(optional accessory)
Select a folder*5 Press 2 /1 . Press #FM+/ AM–.
Repeat play*4*6 Press 4 repeatedly.
iPod/iPhone
[FILE REPEAT]/[FOLDER REPEAT]/[ALL REPEAT] : MP3/WMA/AAC/
WAV/FLAC file
KCA-iP102/KCA-iP103 [FILE REPEAT]/[FOLDER REPEAT]/[REPEAT OFF] : iPod
(optional accessory)*1 or Random play*4*6 Press 3 repeatedly.
accessory of the iPod/iPhone*2
[FOLDER RANDOM]/[RANDOM OFF] : MP3/WMA/AAC/WAV/FLAC
file or iPod
Press and hold 3 to select [ALL RANDOM].
ANDROID*3
*1 KCA-iP102: 30-pin type, KCA-iP103: Lightning type
*2 Do not leave the cable inside the car when not used.
*3 You can control Android device using the Android device itself via other media player application installed in the
USB cable*2 Android device.
(commercially available) *4 Not applicable for ANDROID.
*5 This does not work for iPod/ANDROID.
*6 For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is selected. (Page 9)

8 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 8 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
USB/iPod/ANDROID

Select music drive Select control mode

While in USB source, press 5 repeatedly. While in iPod USB source (or iPod BT source), press 5 repeatedly.
[MODE ON]: Control iPod using the iPod itself. However, you can still perform
Stored songs in the following drive will be played back.
play/pause, file skip, fast-forward or fast-reverse from this unit.
• Selected internal or external memory of a smartphone (Mass Storage
[MODE OFF]: Control iPod from this unit.
Class).
• Selected drive of a multiple drive device.
Select a file from a folder/list
Settings to use KENWOOD Remote application For iPod, applicable only when [MODE OFF] is selected.
KENWOOD Remote application is designed to control the KENWOOD car 1 Press .
receiver’s operations from the following devices: 2 Turn the volume knob to select a folder/list, then press the knob.
: iPhone/iPod (via Bluetooth or via USB input terminal) or 3 Turn the volume knob to select a file, then press the knob.
Android smartphone (via Bluetooth)
: Android smartphone (via Bluetooth) Quick search (applicable only for USB source)
• For , “R.APP” indicator on the display window lights up when If you have many files, you can search through them quickly.
KENWOOD Remote application is connected. Turn the volume knob quickly to browse through the list quickly.
Preparation: Skip search (applicable only for iPod USB source or iPod BT source)
• Install the latest version of KENWOOD Remote application on your device Press S / T to search at a preset skip search ratio. (Page 10)
before connecting. • Pressing and holding S / T searches at a 10% ratio.
• For more information, visit <www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/>.
Alphabet search (applicable only for iPod USB source or iPod BT source)
You can make the settings in the same way as connection via Bluetooth. You can search for a file according to the first character.
(Page 17)
1 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter character search.
2 Turn the volume knob to select the character.
Listen to TuneIn Radio/TuneIn Radio Pro
• Select “ ” to search for a character other than A to Z, 0 to 9.
While listening to TuneIn Radio or TuneIn Radio Pro, connect the iPod/
*
3 Press S / T to move to the entry position.
iPhone to the USB input terminal of the unit. • You can enter up to 3 characters.
• The unit will output the sound from these applications. 4 Press the volume knob to start searching.

ENGLISH 9

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 9 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
USB/iPod/ANDROID Spotify
• To return to the root folder/first file/top menu, press 5. (Not applicable for You can listen to Spotify on the following devices via USB input terminal (see
BT AUDIO source.) the following) or via Bluetooth (page 12).
• To return to the previous setting item, press .
: iPhone/iPod (via Bluetooth or via USB input terminal) or
• To cancel, press and hold .
Android smartphone (via Bluetooth)
: Android smartphone (via Bluetooth)
Direct Music Search (using the remote control) Preparation:
1 Press DIRECT. Install the latest version of the Spotify application on your device (iPhone/
2 Press the number buttons to enter a file number. iPod touch), then create an account and log in to Spotify.
3 Press ENT IW to search for music. • Select [ON] for [SPOTIFY SRC] in [SOURCE SELECT]. (Page 5)

• To cancel, press or DIRECT.

• Not available if Random Play is selected. Start listening
• Not applicable for iPod USB and ANDROID source. 1 Start up the Spotify application on your device.
2 Connect your device to the USB input terminal.
Other settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. USB input terminal
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob.
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected or activated.
4 Press and hold to exit. KCA-iP102/KCA-iP103 (optional
accessory)*1 or accessory of the iPod/
To return to the previous setting item, press . iPhone*2
Default: [XX]
3 Press B SRC repeatedly to select SPOTIFY.
[USB] Broadcast starts automatically
[MUSIC DRIVE] [DRIVE CHANGE]: The next drive ([DRIVE 1] to [DRIVE 4]) is selected
automatically and playback starts. *1 KCA-iP102: 30-pin type, KCA-iP103: Lightning type
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to select the following drives. *2 Do not leave the cable inside the car when not used.
[SKIP SEARCH] (For )
[0.5%]/[1%]/[5%]/[10%]: While listening to iPod USB source (or iPod BT
source), selects the skip search ratio over the total files.

10 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 10 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
Spotify
To On the faceplate On the remote control Search for a song or station
Play back/pause Press 6 IW. Press ENT IW. 1 Press .
Skip a track Press S*3 / T. Press S*3 / T (+). 2 Turn the volume knob to select a list type, then press the knob.
The list types displayed differ depending on the information sent from
Select thumbs up or Press 2 /1 . Press #FM+/ AM–. Spotify.
thumbs down *4
3 Turn the volume knob (or press J / K on the remote control) to select
Start radio Press and hold 5. ( Not available ) the desired song or station.
Repeat play*5 Press 4 repeatedly. 4 Press the volume knob (or press ENT IW on the remote control) to
confirm.
[REPEAT ALL], [REPEAT ONE]*3, ( Not available )
You can browse through the list quickly by turning the volume knob
[REPEAT OFF] quickly.
Random play*5 Press 3 repeatedly *3. To cancel, press and hold .
( Not available )
[SHUFFLE ON], [SHUFFLE OFF]

*3 Available for premium account users only.

*4 This feature is available for tracks in Radio only. If thumbs down is selected, the current track is
skipped.
*5 Available for tracks in Playlists only.

Save favorite song information

While listening to the Radio on Spotify...
Press and hold the volume knob.
“SAVED” appears and the information is stored to “Your Music” or “Your
Library” on your Spotify account.
To unsave, repeat the same procedure.
“REMOVED” appears and the information is removed from “Your Music” or
“Your Library” on your Spotify account.

ENGLISH 11

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 11 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®
BLUETOOTH — Connection Depending on the operating system and the firmware version of your
mobile phone, Bluetooth features may not work with this unit.
Supported Bluetooth profiles
– Hands-Free Profile (HFP)
– Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Pair and connect a Bluetooth device for the first time
– Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
– Serial Port Profile (SPP) 1 Press B SRC to turn on the unit.
– Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP) 2 Search and select the name of your receiver (“KMM-BT3 ”/
“KMM-BT2 ”) on the Bluetooth device.
Supported Bluetooth codecs “PAIRING” “PASS XXXXXX” “Device name” “PRESS” “VOLUME
– Sub Band Codec (SBC) KNOB” appears on the display.
– Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) • For some Bluetooth devices, you may need to enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) code immediately after searching.
Connect the microphone 3 Press the volume knob to start pairing.
“PAIRING OK” appears when pairing is completed.
Rear panel
Once pairing is completed, Bluetooth connection is established
automatically.
• : “BT1” and/or “BT2” indicator on the faceplate lights up.
Microphone (supplied)
• : “BT1” and/or “BT2” on the display window lights up.
Microphone input jack
• This unit supports Secure Simple Pairing (SSP).
• Up to five devices can be registered (paired) in total.
• Once the pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device will remain registered
in the unit even if you reset the unit. To delete the paired device, see
[DEVICE DELETE] on page 16.
• A maximum of two Bluetooth phones and one Bluetooth audio device can
be connected at any time.
However, while in BT AUDIO source, you can connect to five Bluetooth
audio devices and switch between these five devices. (Page 17)
Adjust the microphone angle • Some Bluetooth devices may not automatically connect to the unit after
pairing. Connect the device to the unit manually.
Secure using cord clamps (not
• Refer to the instruction manual of the Bluetooth device for more
supplied) if necessary.
information.

12 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 12 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®
The following operations may differ or be unavailable depending on the
Auto Pairing (for )
connected phone.
When you connect iPhone/iPod touch to the USB input terminal, pairing
On the remote
request (via Bluetooth) is automatically activated. To On the faceplate
control
Press the volume knob to pair once you have confirmed the device name. First incoming call...
Automatic pairing request is activated only if: Answer a call Press or the Press .
– Bluetooth function of the connected device is turned on. volume knob or
– [AUTO PAIRING] is set to [ON]. (Page 16) one of the number
buttons (1 to 6).
Reject a call Press . Press .
BLUETOOTH — Mobile phone
End a call Press . Press .
While talking on the first incoming call...
Answer another incoming Press . Press .
call and hold the current call
Reject another incoming Press . Press .
call
While having two active calls...
End current call and activate Press . Press .
Receive a call
held call
When there is an incoming call: Swap between the current Press . Press .
• : ZONE 2 illuminates in green color and flashes. call and held call
• The unit answers the call automatically if [AUTO ANSWER] is set to a selected
time. (Page 14) Adjust the phone volume*1 Turn the volume Press VOL *2 or
[00] to [35] (Default: [15]) knob during a call. VOL during a call.
During a call:
• : ZONE 1 illuminates according to the settings made for Switch between hands-free Press 6 IW during
( Not available )
[DISPLAY] (page 24) and ZONE 2 illuminates in green color. and private talk modes*3 a call.
• If you turn off the unit or detach the faceplate, Bluetooth is disconnected.
*1 This adjustment will not affect the volume of the other sources.
*2 Press and hold VOL to continuously increase the volume to 15.
*3 Operations may vary according to the connected Bluetooth device.

ENGLISH 13

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 13 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®
Improve the voice quality Make a call
While talking on the phone... You can make a call from the call history, phonebook, or dialing the number.
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. Call by voice is also possible if your mobile phone has the feature.
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob. 1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected or activated. “(First device name)” appears.
4 Press and hold to exit. • If two Bluetooth phones are connected, press again to switch to the
other phone.
To return to the previous setting item, press . “(Second device name)” appears.
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
Default: [XX] press the knob.
[MIC GAIN] [–10] to [+10] ([–4]): The sensitivity of the microphone increases as the 3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected/activated or follow the
number increases. instructions stated on the selected item.
[NR LEVEL] [–5] to [+5] ([0]): Adjust the noise reduction level until the least noise is 4 Press and hold to exit.
being heard during a phone conversation. To return to the previous setting item, press .
[ECHO CANCEL] [–5] to [+5] ([0]): Adjust the echo cancellation delay time until the least
echo is being heard during a phone conversation. [CALL HISTORY] (Applicable only if the phone supports PBAP.)
1 Press the volume knob to select a name or a phone number.
• “I” indicates call received, “O“ indicates call made, “M” indicates call
Make the setting for answering a call missed.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode. • Press DISP to change the display category (NUMBER or NAME).
2 Turn the volume knob to select [SETTINGS], then press the knob. • “NO DATA” appears if there is no recorded call history or call number.
3 Turn the volume knob to select [AUTO ANSWER], then press the knob. 2 Press the volume knob to call.
4 Turn the volume knob to select the time (in seconds) for the unit to
answer the call automatically, then press the knob.
[01] to [30], or select [OFF] to cancels. (Default: [OFF])
5 Press and hold to exit.
To return to the previous setting item, press .

14 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 14 7/19/2018 10:16:52 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®

[PHONE BOOK] (Applicable only if the phone supports PBAP.) Make a call using voice recognition
1 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter alphabet search mode (if the 1 Press and hold to activate the voice recognition of the connected
phonebook contains many contacts).
phone.
The first menu (ABCDEFGHIJK) appears.
2 Speak the name of the contact you want to call or the voice command
• To go to the other menu (LMNOPQRSTUV or WXYZ1 ), press 2 /
1 . to control the phone functions.
• To select the desired first letter, turn the volume knob or press • Supported Voice Recognition features vary for each phone. Refer to the
S / T, then press the knob. instruction manual of the connected phone for details.
Select “1” to search with numbers and select “ ” to search with
symbols.
2 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the knob. Settings in memory
3 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then press the knob to Store a contact in memory
call.
You can store up to 6 contacts into the number buttons (1 to 6).
• The phonebook of the connected phone is automatically transferred to 1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
the unit when pairing.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY], [PHONE BOOK] or
• Contacts are categorized as: HM (home), OF (office), MO (mobile),
[NUMBER DIAL], then press the knob.
OT (other), GE (general)
• This unit can display only non-accent letters. (Accent letters such as “Ú” 3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact or enter a phone number.
are shown as “U”.) If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number.
[NUMBER DIAL] 1 Turn the volume knob to select a number (0 to 9) or character ( , #, +). 4 Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
2 Press S / T to move the entry position. “STORED” appears when the contact is stored.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the phone number.
3 Press the volume knob to call. To erase a contact from the preset memory, select [NUMBER DIAL] in step 2
and store a blank number.
(or using the remote control)
1 Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to enter the phone number.
Make a call from memory
2 Press to call.
[VOICE] Speak the name of the contact you want to call or the voice command to 1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
control the phone functions. (See “Make a call using voice recognition”.) 2 Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
3 Press the volume knob to call.
[LOW]/[MID]/[FULL]: Shows the strength of the battery.* “NO MEMORY” appears if there is no contact stored.
[NO SIGNAL]/[LOW]/[MID]/[MAX]: Shows the strength of the current received signal.*
* Functionality depends on the type of the phone used.

ENGLISH 15

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 15 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®

Other settings [INITIALIZE] [YES]: Initializes all the Bluetooth settings (including stored pairing,
phonebook, and etc.). ; [NO]: Cancels.
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob. Bluetooth test mode
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected/activated or follow the
instructions stated on the selected item. You can check the connectivity of the supported profile between the
4 Press and hold to exit. Bluetooth device and the unit.
• Make sure there is no Bluetooth device paired.
To return to the previous setting item, press .
1 Press and hold .
Default: [XX] “PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE PIN 0000” appears on the display.
2 Search and select the name of your receiver (“KMM-BT3 ”/
[BT MODE] “KMM-BT2 ”) on the Bluetooth device.
[PHONE SELECT]* Selects the phone or audio device to connect or disconnect. 3 Operate the Bluetooth device to confirm pairing.
“ ” appears in front of the device name when connected. “TESTING” flashes on the display.
[AUDIO SELECT]* “ ” appears in front of the current playback audio device.
[DEVICE DELETE] 1 Turn the volume knob to select a device to delete, then press the The connectivity result (OK or NG) appears after the test.
knob. PAIRING: Pairing status
2 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob. HF CNT: Hands-Free Profile (HFP) compatibility
AUD CNT: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) compatibility
[PIN CODE EDIT] Changes the PIN code (up to 6 digits). PB DL: Phonebook Access profile (PBAP) compatibility
(0000) 1 Turn the volume knob to select a number.
2 Press S / T to move the entry position. To cancel test mode, press and hold B SRC to turn off the unit.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the PIN code.
3 Press the volume knob to confirm.
[RECONNECT] [ON]: The unit is automatically reconnected when the last connected
Bluetooth device is within the connectable range. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
[AUTO PAIRING] [ON]: The unit is automatically paired with the supported Bluetooth
device (iPhone/iPod touch) when it is connected through USB input
terminal. Depending on the operating system of the connected device,
this function may not work. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
* You can only connect a maximum of two Bluetooth phones and one Bluetooth audio device at
any time.

16 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 16 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®
BLUETOOTH — Audio To On the faceplate On the remote control
Random play Press and hold 3 to
select [ALL RANDOM].
( Not available )
• Press 3 to select
[RANDOM OFF].
Select a file from a folder/ Refer to “Select a file
list from a folder/list” on ( Not available )
While in BT AUDIO source, you can connect to five Bluetooth audio devices page 9.
and switch between these five devices. Switch between connected Press 5.* ( Not available )
Bluetooth audio devices
Audio player via Bluetooth
* Pressing the “Play” key on the connected device itself also causes switching of sound output
1 Press B SRC repeatedly (or press SRC on the remote control) to select from the device.
BT AUDIO.
Operations and display indications may differ according to their availability
• Pressing enters BT AUDIO directly.
on the connected device.
2 Operate the audio player via Bluetooth to start playback.

Settings to use KENWOOD Remote application

To On the faceplate On the remote control
Play back/pause Press 6 IW. Press ENT IW. KENWOOD Remote application is designed to control the KENWOOD car
receiver’s operations from the following devices:
Select group or folder Press 2 /1 . Press #FM+/ AM–.
: iPhone/iPod (via Bluetooth or via USB input terminal) or
Reverse skip/Forward skip Press S / T. Press S / T (+). Android smartphone (via Bluetooth)
Reverse/Fast-forward Press and hold S Press and hold S / : Android smartphone (via Bluetooth)
/ T. T (+). • For , “R.APP” indicator on the display window lights up when
Repeat play Press 4 repeatedly. KENWOOD Remote application is connected.

[ALL REPEAT], ( Not available ) Preparation:

[FILE REPEAT], • Install the latest version of KENWOOD Remote application on your device
[REPEAT OFF] before connecting.
• For more information, visit <www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/>.

ENGLISH 17

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 17 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
BLUETOOTH®
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. Listen to iPhone/iPod via Bluetooth (for )
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob. You can listen to the songs on the iPhone/iPod via Bluetooth on this unit.
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected or activated. Press B SRC repeatedly to select iPod BT.
4 Press and hold to exit.
• You can operate the iPod/iPhone in the same way as iPod/iPhone via USB
To return to the previous setting item, press .
input terminal. (Page 8)
• If you plug in an iPhone/iPod to the USB input terminal while listening to
Default: [XX]
iPod BT source, the source automatically changes to iPod USB. Press B SRC
[REMOTE APP] to select iPod BT if the device is still connected via Bluetooth.
[SELECT] Selects the device (IOS or ANDROID) to use the application.
[IOS] [YES]: Selects iPhone/iPod to use the application via Bluetooth or connected Internet radio via Bluetooth
via USB input terminal. ; [NO]: Cancels. You can listen to internet radio (Spotify) on the following devices via
If IOS is selected, select iPod BT source (or iPod USB source if your iPhone/ Bluetooth on this unit.
iPod is connected via USB input terminal) to activate the application. • Make sure the USB input terminal is not connected to any device.
• The connectivity of the application will be interrupted or disconnected if:
– You change from iPod BT source to any playback source connected via : iPhone/iPod touch/Android device
the USB input terminal. : Android device
– You change from iPod USB source to iPod BT source.
Listen to Spotify
[ANDROID] [YES]: Selects Android smartphone to use the application via Bluetooth. ;
[NO]: Cancels. Preparation:
Select [ON] for [SPOTIFY SRC] in [SOURCE SELECT]. (Page 5)
[ANDROID LIST]* Selects the Android smartphone to use from the list.
1 Start up the Spotify application on your device.
[STATUS] Shows the status of the selected device.
2 Connect your device via Bluetooth connection. (Page 12)
[IOS CONNECTED]: You are able to use the application using the iPhone/
3 Press B SRC repeatedly to select SPOTIFY (for iPhone/iPod) or
iPod connected via Bluetooth or USB input terminal.
[IOS NOT CONNECTED]: No IOS device is connected to use the application. SPOTIFY BT (for Android device).
[ANDROID CONNECTED]: You are able to use the application using the The source switches and broadcast starts automatically.
Android smartphone connected via Bluetooth. • You can operate Spotify in the same way as Spotify via USB input terminal.
[ANDROID NOT CONNECTED]: No Android device is connected to use the (Page 10)
application.
* Displayed only when [ANDROID] of [SELECT] is set to [YES].

18 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 18 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
AUDIO SETTINGS
[MANUAL EQ] Adjusts your own sound settings for each source.
• The settings are stored to [USER] in [PRESET EQ].
• The settings made may affect the current settings of [EASY EQ].
[62.5HZ] [LEVEL] [LEVEL –9] to [LEVEL +9] ([LEVEL 0]): Adjusts the
level to memorize for each source.
(Before making an adjustment, select the source you
want to adjust.)
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. [BASS EXTEND] [ON]: Turns on the extended bass. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (see the following table), then
press the knob. [100HZ]/[160HZ]/ [LEVEL –9] to [LEVEL +9] ([LEVEL 0]): Adjusts the level to memorize
3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected or activated. [250HZ]/[400HZ]/ for each source.
4 Press and hold to exit. [630HZ]/[1KHZ]/ (Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to adjust.)
[1.6KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/
(or using the remote control) [4KHZ]/[6.3KHZ]/
[10KHZ]/[16KHZ]
1 Press AUD to enter [AUDIO CONTROL].
2 Press J/K to select an item, then press ENT IW. [Q FACTOR] [1.35]/[1.50]/[2.00]: Adjusts the quality factor.
[PRESET EQ] [NATURAL]/[ROCK]/[POPS]/[EASY]/[TOP40]/[JAZZ]/[POWERFUL]/
To return to the previous setting item, press . [USER]: Selects a preset equalizer suitable to the music genre. (Select
[USER] to use the settings made in [EASY EQ] or [MANUAL EQ].)
Default: [XX]
[BASS BOOST] [LV1] to [LV5]: Selects your preferred bass boost level. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
[AUDIO CONTROL]
[LOUDNESS] [LV1]/[LV2]: Selects your preferred low or high frequencies boost to
[SUB-W LEVEL] [LEVEL –50] to [LEVEL +10] ([LEVEL 0]): Adjusts the subwoofer output produce a well-balanced sound at low volume. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
level.
[SUBWOOFER SET] [ON]: Turns on the subwoofer output. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
[EASY EQ] Adjusts your own sound settings.
• The settings are stored to [USER] in [PRESET EQ]. [FADER] (Not applicable if 3-way crossover is selected.)
• The settings made may affect the current settings of [MANUAL EQ]. [R15] to [F15] ([0]): Adjusts the front and rear speaker output balance.
[SW]: [LEVEL –50] to [LEVEL +10] (Default: [LEVEL 0] [BALANCE] [L15] to [R15] ([0]): Adjusts the left and right speaker output balance.
[BASS]: [LEVEL –9] to [LEVEL +9] [LEVEL 0]
[MID]: [LEVEL –9] to [LEVEL +9] [LEVEL 0] [VOLUME OFFSET] [–15] to [+6] ([0]): Presets the initial volume level of each source by
[TRE]: [LEVEL –9] to [LEVEL +9] [LEVEL 0]) comparing to the FM volume level.
(Before adjustment, select the source you want to adjust.)

ENGLISH 19

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 19 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
AUDIO SETTINGS

[SOUND EFFECT] Crossover settings

[SOUND RECNSTR] (Not applicable for RADIO source and AUX source.) Below are the available setting items for 2-way crossover and 3-way
(Sound [ON]: Creates realistic sound by compensating the high-frequency crossover.
reconstruction) components and restoring the rise-time of the waveform that are lost in
audio data compression. ; [OFF]: Cancels. SPEAKER SIZE
[SPACE ENHANCE] (Not applicable for RADIO source.) Selects according to the connected speaker size for optimum performance.
[SML]/[MED]/[LRG]: Virtually enhances the sound space. ; • The frequency and slope settings are automatically set for the crossover of
[OFF]: Cancels. the selected speaker.
• If [NONE] is selected for the following speaker in [SPEAKER SIZE], the [X ‘ OVER]
[SND REALIZER] [LV1]/[LV2]/[LV3]: Virtually makes the sound more realistic. ; setting of the selected speaker is not available.
[OFF]: Cancels. – 2-way crossover: [TWEETER] of [FRONT]/[REAR]/[SUBWOOFER]
[STAGE EQ] [LOW]/[MID]/[HI]: Virtually adjusts the sound position heard from the – 3-way crossover: [WOOFER]
speakers. ; [OFF]: Cancels.
X ‘ OVER (crossover)
[DRIVE EQ] [ON]: Boosts the frequency to reduce the noise heard from outside the • [FRQ]/[F-HPF FRQ]/[R-HPF FRQ]/[SW LPF FRQ]/[HPF FRQ]/[LPF FRQ]: Adjusts the
car or running noise of the tyres. ; [OFF]: Cancels. crossover frequency for the selected speakers (high pass filter or low pass
[SPEAKER SIZE] Depending on the crossover type you have selected (see “Change the filter).
crossover type” on page 5), 2-way crossover or 3-way crossover If [THROUGH] is selected, all signals are sent to the selected speakers.
setting items will be shown. (See “Crossover settings”.) • [SLOPE]/[F-HPF SLOPE]/[R-HPF SLOPE]/[SW LPF SLOPE]/[HPF SLOPE]/[LPF SLOPE]:
[X ‘ OVER]
By default, 2-way crossover type is selected. Adjusts the crossover slope.
Selectable only if a setting other than [THROUGH] is selected for the
[DTA SETTINGS] crossover frequency.
For settings, see “Digital Time Alignment settings” on page 22.
[CAR SETTINGS] • [SW LPF PHASE]/[PHASE]: Selects the phase of the speaker output to be in line
with the other speaker output.
• : For 2-way crossover: [SUB-W LEVEL]/[SUBWOOFER SET] is • [GAIN LEFT]/[GAIN RIGHT]/[F-HPF GAIN]/[R-HPF GAIN]/[SW LPF GAIN]/[GAIN]: Adjusts
selectable only if [SWITCH PREOUT] is set to [SUB-W]. (Page 4) the output volume of the selected speaker.
• [SUB-W LEVEL] is selectable only if [SUBWOOFER SET] is set to [ON].

20 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 20 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
AUDIO SETTINGS
2-way crossover setting items [SUBWOOFER [SW LPF FRQ] [30HZ]/[40HZ]/[50HZ]/[60HZ]/[70HZ]/[80HZ]/
LPF]*1*2 [90HZ]/[100HZ]/[120HZ]/[150HZ]/[180HZ]/
[SPEAKER SIZE] [220HZ]/[250HZ]/[THROUGH]
[FRONT] [SIZE] [8CM]/[10CM]/[12CM]/[13CM]/[16CM]/[17CM]/ [SW LPF SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB]/[–18DB]/[–24DB]
[18CM]/[4×6]/[5×7]/[6×8]/[6×9]/[7×10]
[SW LPF PHASE] [REVERSE] (180°)/[NORMAL] (0°)
[TWEETER] [SMALL]/[MIDDLE]/[LARGE]/[NONE] (not
[SW LPF GAIN] [–8] to [0]
connected)
[REAR] [8CM]/[10CM]/[12CM]/[13CM]/[16CM]/[17CM]/[18CM]/[4×6]/
[5×7]/[6×8]/[6×9]/[7×10]/[NONE] (not connected) 3-way crossover setting items
[SUBWOOFER]*1*2 [16CM]/[20CM]/[25CM]/[30CM]/[38CM OVER]/[NONE] (not [SPEAKER SIZE]
connected)
[TWEETER] [SMALL]/[MIDDLE]/[LARGE]
[X ' OVER]
[MID RANGE] [8CM]/[10CM]/[12CM]/[13CM]/[16CM]/[17CM]/[18CM]/[4×6]/
[TWEETER] [FRQ] [1KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[5KHZ]/ [5×7]/[6×8]/[6×9]
[6.3KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[12.5KHZ]
[WOOFER]*2 [16CM]/[20CM]/[25CM]/[30CM]/[38CM OVER]/[NONE] (not
[GAIN LEFT] [–8] to [0] connected)
[GAIN RIGHT] [–8] to [0] [X ' OVER]
[FRONT HPF] [F-HPF FRQ] [30HZ]/[40HZ]/[50HZ]/[60HZ]/[70HZ]/[80HZ]/ [TWEETER] [HPF FRQ] [1KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[5KHZ]/
[90HZ]/[100HZ]/[120HZ]/[150HZ]/[180HZ]/ [6.3KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[12.5KHZ]
[220HZ]/[250HZ]/[THROUGH]
[SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB]
[F-HPF SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB]/[–18DB]/[–24DB]
[PHASE] [REVERSE] (180°)/[NORMAL] (0°)
[F-HPF GAIN] [–8] to [0]
[GAIN] [–8] to [0]
[REAR HPF] [R-HPF FRQ]
[R-HPF SLOPE] Refer [FRONT HPF] settings above. *1, *2 : See page 22
[R-HPF GAIN]

ENGLISH 21

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 21 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
AUDIO SETTINGS
[MID RANGE] [HPF FRQ] [30HZ]/[40HZ]/[50HZ]/[60HZ]/[70HZ]/[80HZ]/ Digital Time Alignment settings
[90HZ]/[100HZ]/[120HZ]/[150HZ]/[180HZ]/
[220HZ]/[250HZ]/[THROUGH] Digital Time Alignment sets the delay time of the speaker output to create a
more suitable environment for your vehicle.
[HPF SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB] • For more information, see “Determining the value for [DISTANCE] and [GAIN]
[LPF FRQ] [1KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[5KHZ]/ of [DTA SETTINGS]” on page 23.
[6.3KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[12.5KHZ]/[THROUGH]
[LPF SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB] [DTA SETTINGS]
[PHASE] [REVERSE] (180°)/[NORMAL] (0°) [POSITION] Selects your listening position (reference point).
[ALL]: Not compensating ; [FRONT RIGHT]: Front right seat ;
[GAIN] [–8] to [0]
[FRONT LEFT]: Front left seat ; [FRONT ALL]: Front seat
[WOOFER]*2 [LPF FRQ] [30HZ]/[40HZ]/[50HZ]/[60HZ]/[70HZ]/[80HZ]/ • [FRONT ALL] is displayed only when [2-WAY X’OVER] is selected.
[90HZ]/[100HZ]/[120HZ]/[150HZ]/[180HZ]/ (Page 5)
[220HZ]/[250HZ]/[THROUGH]
[DISTANCE] [0CM] to [610CM]: Fine adjust the distance to compensate.
[SLOPE] [–6DB]/[–12DB] (Before making an adjustment, select the speaker you want to adjust.)
[PHASE] [REVERSE] (180°)/[NORMAL] (0°) [GAIN] [–8DB] to [0DB]: Fine adjust the output volume of the selected speaker.
[GAIN] [–8] to [0] (Before making an adjustment, select the speaker you want to adjust.)
[DTA RESET] [YES]: Resets the settings ([DISTANCE] and [GAIN]) of the selected
*1 : Selectable only when [SWITCH PREOUT] is set to [SUB-W]. (Page 4) [POSITION] to default. ; [NO]: Cancels.
*2 Selectable only when [SUBWOOFER SET] is set to [ON]. (Page 19)
[CAR SETTINGS] Identify your car type and rear speaker location in order to make the
adjustment for [DTA SETTINGS].
[CAR TYPE] [COMPACT]/[FULL SIZE CAR]/[WAGON]/[MINIVAN]/[SUV]/
[MINIVAN(LONG)]: Selects the type of vehicle. ; [OFF]: Not
compensating.
[R-SP LOCATION] Selects the location of the rear speakers in your vehicle to calculate the
furthest distance from the listening position selected (reference point).
• [DOOR]/[REAR DECK]: Selectable only when [CAR TYPE] is selected as
[OFF], [COMPACT], [FULL SIZE CAR], [WAGON] or [SUV].
• [2ND ROW]/[3RD ROW]: Selectable only when [CAR TYPE] is selected
as [MINIVAN] or [MINIVAN(LONG)].

22 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 22 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
AUDIO SETTINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS
• Before making an adjustment for [DISTANCE] and [GAIN] of [DTA SETTINGS], : Zone identification for color settings and brightness settings
select the speaker you want to adjust:
When 2-way crossover is selected:
[FRONT LEFT]/[FRONT RIGHT]/[REAR LEFT]/[REAR RIGHT]/[SUBWOOFER]
– You can only select [REAR LEFT], [REAR RIGHT] and [SUBWOOFER] if a setting
other than [NONE] is selected for [REAR] and [SUBWOOFER] of [SPEAKER SIZE].
(Page 21)
When 3-way crossover is selected:
[TWEETER LEFT]/[TWEETER RIGHT]/[MID LEFT]/[MID RIGHT]/[WOOFER]
– You can only select [WOOFER] if a setting other than [NONE] is selected for
[WOOFER] of [SPEAKER SIZE]. (Page 21)
: Zone identification for brightness setting
• [R-SP LOCATION] of [CAR SETTINGS] is selectable only if:
– 2-way crossover is selected. (Page 5)
– A setting other than [NONE] is selected for [REAR] of [SPEAKER SIZE].
(Page 21)

Determining the value for [DISTANCE] and [GAIN] of [DTA SETTINGS]

If you specify the distance from the center of the
currently set listening position to every speaker,
the delay time will be automatically computed
and set.
1 Determines the center of the currently set 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
listening position as the reference point. 2 Turn the volume knob to select an item (page 24), then press the
2 Measures the distances from the reference knob.
point to the speakers. 3 Repeat step 2 until the desired item is selected/activated or follow the
3 Calculates the differences between the instructions stated on the selected item.
distance of the furthest speaker (rear speaker) 4 Press and hold to exit.
and other speakers.
To return to the previous setting item, press .
4 Sets the [DISTANCE] calculated in step 3 for
individual speakers.
5 Adjusts [GAIN] for individual speakers.
Example: When [FRONT ALL] is selected as the
listening position

ENGLISH 23

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 23 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Default: [XX] [LEVEL METER] (For )
[DISPLAY] [ON]: Shows the level meter on the display window (as shown below). ;
[OFF]: Cancels.
[COLOR SELECT] (For )
Selects illumination colors for [ALL ZONE], [ZONE 1] and [ZONE 2]
separately.
1 Select a zone ([ZONE 1], [ZONE 2], [ALL ZONE]). (See the illustration on
page 23.) Level meter
2 Select a color for the selected zone.
[INITIAL COLOR]/[VARIABLE SCAN]/[CUSTOM R/G/B]/[RED1]/[RED2]/
[RED3]/[PURPLE1]/[PURPLE2]/[PURPLE3]/[PURPLE4]/[BLUE1]/
[BLUE2]/[BLUE3]/[SKYBLUE1]/[SKYBLUE2]/[LIGHTBLUE]/[AQUA1]/
[AQUA2]/[GREEN1]/[GREEN2]/[GREEN3]/[YELLOWGREEN1]/
[YELLOWGREEN2]/[YELLOW]/[ORANGE1]/[ORANGE2]/[ORANGERED]

To make your own color, select [CUSTOM R/G/B]. The color you have made
will be stored in [CUSTOM R/G/B].
1 Press the volume knob to enter the detailed color adjustment.
2 Press S/T to select the color ([R]/[G]/[B]) to adjust.
3 Turn the volume knob to adjust the level ([0] to [9]), then press the knob.
[DIMMER] Dims the illumination.
[ON]: Dimmer is turned on.
[OFF]: Dimmer is turned off.
[DIMMER TIME]: Set the dimmer on and off time.
1 Turn the volume knob to adjust the [ON] time, then press the knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to adjust the [OFF] time, then press the knob.
Default: [ON]: [6:00PM] ; [OFF]: [6:00AM]
[BRIGHTNESS] 1 Select a zone. (See the illustration on page 23.)
2 [LVL 00] to [LVL 31]: Set the brightness level for the selected zone.
[TEXT SCROLL] [ONCE]: Scrolls the display information once. ; [AUTO]: Repeats scrolling at
5-second intervals. ; [OFF]: Cancels.

24 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 24 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
REFERENCES
Maintenance About iPod/iPhone
Cleaning the unit • Via USB input terminal:
Wipe off dirt on the faceplate with a dry silicone or soft cloth. Made for
– iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
Cleaning the connector – iPod nano (7th generation)
Detach the faceplate and clean the connector gently – iPhone 4S, 5, 5S, 5C, 6, 6 Plus, 6S, 6S Plus, SE, 7, 7 Plus, 8, 8 Plus, X
with a cotton swab. Be careful not to damage the • Via Bluetooth:
connector. Made for
Connector (on the reverse – iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
side of the faceplate) – iPhone 4S, 5, 5S, 5C, 6, 6 Plus, 6S, 6S Plus, SE, 7, 7 Plus, 8, 8 Plus, X
• It is not possible to browse video files on the “Videos” menu in [MODE OFF].
• The song order displayed on the selection menu of this unit may differ from that of the iPod/
More information iPhone.
For: – Latest firmware updates and latest compatible item list • You cannot operate iPod if “KENWOOD” or “ ” is displayed on iPod.
– KENWOOD original application • Depending on the version of the operating system of the iPod/iPhone, some functions may not
– Any other latest information operate on this unit.
Visit <www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/>.
About Android device
Playable files • This unit supports Android OS 4.1 and above.
• Playable audio file for USB mass storage class device: • Some Android devices (with OS 4.1 and above) may not fully support Android Open Accessory
MP3 (.mp3), WMA (.wma), AAC (.aac), AAC (.m4a), WAV (.wav), FLAC (.flac) (AOA) 2.0.
• Playable USB device file system: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 • If the Android device supports both mass storage class device and AOA 2.0, this unit always
Even when audio files comply with the standards listed above, playback may be impossible playback via AOA 2.0 as priority.
depending on the types or conditions of media or devices.
• For detailed information and notes about the playable audio files, visit About Spotify
<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/>. • Spotify application supports:
– iPhone 4S, 5, 5S, 5C, 6, 6 Plus, 6S, 6S Plus, SE, 7, 7 Plus (iOS 8 or above)
About USB devices – iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
• You cannot connect a USB device via a USB hub. – Android OS 4.0.3 or above
• Connecting a cable whose total length is longer than 5 m may result in abnormal playback. • Spotify is a third party service, therefore the specifications are subject to change without prior
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating is other than 5 V and exceeds 1.5 A. notice. Accordingly, compatibility may be impaired or some or all of the services may become
unavailable.
• Some functions of Spotify cannot be operated from this unit.
• For issues using the application, please contact Spotify at <www.spotify.com>.

ENGLISH 25

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 25 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
REFERENCES
About Bluetooth Source name Display information: Main display
• Depending on the Bluetooth version of the device, some Bluetooth devices may not be able to
connect to this unit. ANDROID Source name Date back to the beginning
• This unit may not work with some Bluetooth devices. SPOTIFY/ Context title Song title Artist Album title Playing Time Date
• Signal conditions vary, depending on the surroundings. SPOTIFY BT back to the beginning

Change the display information BT AUDIO Song title/Artist Album title/Artist Playing time Date back to the
beginning
Each time you press DISP, the display information changes.
• If the information is unavailable or not recorded, “NO TEXT”, “NO INFO”, or other information AUX Source name Date back to the beginning
(eg. station name) appears or display will be blank.
:
:

Main display Main display

Clock time Level meter (page 24)

Source name Display information: Main display
Source name Display information: Main display STANDBY Source name/Clock Clock back to the beginning
STANDBY Source name Date back to the beginning RADIO Source name/Clock Frequency Clock back to the beginning
RADIO Frequency Date back to the beginning For FM Radio Data System stations only:
For FM Radio Data System stations only: Source name/Clock Station name/Program type Radio text
Station name/Program type Radio text Radio text+ Radio text+ song Radio text+ Radio text+ song title/Radio text+ artist Frequency
title/Radio text+ artist Frequency Date back to the beginning Clock back to the beginning

USB For MP3/WMA/AAC/WAV/FLAC files: USB For MP3/WMA/AAC/WAV/FLAC files:

Song title/Artist Album title/Artist Folder name File name Playing Source name/Clock Song title/Artist Album title/Artist Folder name
time Date back to the beginning File name Playing time Clock back to the beginning

iPod USB/iPod BT When [MODE OFF] is selected (page 9): ANDROID Source name/Clock Clock back to the beginning
Song title/Artist Album title/Artist Playing time Date back to the SPOTIFY/ Source name/Clock Context title Song title Artist Album title
beginning SPOTIFY BT Playing Time Clock back to the beginning

26 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 26 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
REFERENCES TROUBLESHOOTING
Source name Display information: Main display Symptom Remedy
BT AUDIO Source name/Clock Song title/Artist Album title/Artist Playing time Sound cannot be heard. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
Clock back to the beginning • Check the cords and connections.
AUX Source name/Clock Clock back to the beginning “MISWIRING CHECK WIRING Turn the power off, then check to be sure the terminals of
THEN PWR ON” appears. the speaker wires are insulated properly. Turn the power
on again.
“PROTECTING SEND SERVICE” Send the unit to the nearest service center.
appears.
Source cannot be selected. Check the [SOURCE SELECT] setting. (Page 5)

General
• Sound cannot be heard. Clean the connectors. (Page 25)
• The unit does not turn on.
• Information shown on the
display is incorrect.
The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit. (Page 3)
Correct characters are not • This unit can only display uppercase letters, numbers,
displayed. and a limited number of symbols.
• Depending on the display language you have selected
(page 5), some characters may not be displayed
correctly.
• Radio reception is poor. Connect the antenna firmly.

Radio
• Static noise while listening
to the radio.
Playback order is not as The playback order is determined by the order in which
intended. file name were recorded (USB).
USB/iPod
Elapsed playing time is not This depends on the recording process earlier (USB).
correct.
“READING” keeps flashing. • Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
• Reattach the device (USB/iPod/iPhone).

ENGLISH 27

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 27 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

“UNSUPPORTED DEVICE” • Check whether the connected USB device is compatible • Sound cannot be heard • Reconnect the Android device.
appears. with this unit and ensure the file systems are in during playback. • Launch any media player application on the Android
supported formats. (Page 25) • Sound output only from device and start playback.
• Reattach the USB device. the Android device. • Relaunch the current media player application or use
another media player application.
“UNRESPONSIVE DEVICE” Make sure the USB device is not malfunction and reattach
• Restart the Android device.
appears. the USB device.
• If this does not solve the problem, the connected
“USB HUB IS NOT This unit cannot support a USB device connected via a Android device is unable to route the audio signal to unit.
SUPPORTED” appears. USB hub. (Page 25)

ANDROID
• The source does not The USB port is drawing more power than the design • If USB connection does not work, connect the Android
change to “USB” when limit. Turn the power off and unplug the USB device. device via Bluetooth or through auxiliary input jack.
you connect a USB device Then, turn on the power and reattach the USB device. “NO DEVICE” or “READING” • Reconnect the Android device.
while listening to another If this does not solve the problem, turn the power off and keeps flashing. • If USB connection does not work, connect the Android
source. on (or reset the unit) before replacing with another USB device via Bluetooth or through auxiliary input jack.
• “USB ERROR” appears. device.
USB/iPod

Playback is intermittent or Turn off the power saving mode on the Android device.
The iPod/iPhone does not • Check the connection between this unit and iPod/iPhone. sound skips.
turn on or does not work. • Disconnect and reset the iPod/iPhone using hard reset.
“NO MUSIC”/“ANDROID • Make sure Android device contains playable audio files.
“LOADING” appears when This unit is still preparing the iPod/iPhone music list. It ERROR” • Reconnect the Android device.
you enter search mode by may take some time to load, try again later. • Restart the Android device.
pressing . “DISCONNECTED” USB is disconnected from the head unit. Please make
“NA FILE” Make sure the media (USB) contain supported audio files. sure the device is connected properly through USB.
(Page 25) “CONNECTING” • Connected via USB input terminal: The device is
“COPY PRO” A copy-protected file is played (USB). connecting to the head unit. Please wait.

Spotify
• Connected via Bluetooth: The Bluetooth is disconnected.
“NO DEVICE” Connect a device (USB), and change the source to USB Please check Bluetooth connection and make sure both
again. the device and unit are paired and connected.
“NO MUSIC” Connect a device (USB) that contains playable audio files. “CHECK APP” The Spotify application is not connected properly or user
“iPod ERROR” • Reconnect the iPod. is not login. End the Spotify application and restart. Then,
• Reset the iPod. log in to your Spotify account.

28 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 28 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

No Bluetooth device is • Search from the Bluetooth device again. “NO ENTRY”/“NO PAIR” There is no registered device connected/found via
detected. • Reset the unit. (Page 3) Bluetooth.
Pairing cannot be made. • Make sure you have entered the same PIN code to both “ERROR” Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again, check
the unit and Bluetooth device. if the device supports the function you have tried.
• Delete pairing information from both the unit and “NO INFO”/“NO DATA” Bluetooth device cannot get the contact information.

Bluetooth®
the Bluetooth device, then perform pairing again.
(Page 12) “HF ERROR XX”/ Reset the unit and try the operation again. If this does not
“BT ERROR” solve the problem, consult your nearest service center.
Echo or noise is heard during • Adjust the microphone unit’s position. (Page 12)
a phone conversation. • Check the [ECHO CANCEL] setting. (Page 14) “SWITCHING NG” The connected phones might not support phone
switching feature.
Phone sound quality is poor. • Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
device. The Bluetooth connection Delete the unused registered Bluetooth device from the
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better signal between the Bluetooth device unit. (Page 16)
reception. and the unit is unstable.
Bluetooth®

Voice calling method is not • Use voice calling method in a more quiet environment.
successful. • Reduce the distance from the microphone when you
speak the name.
• Make sure the same voice as the registered voice tag is
used.
Sound is being interrupted or • Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
skipped during playback of a audio player.
Bluetooth audio player. • Turn off, then turn on the unit and try to connect again.
• Other Bluetooth devices might be trying to connect to the
unit.
The connected Bluetooth • Check whether the connected Bluetooth audio player
audio player cannot be supports Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
controlled. (Refer to the instructions of your audio player.)
• Disconnect and connect the Bluetooth player again.
“NOT SUPPORT” The connected phone does not support Voice Recognition
feature or phonebook transfer.

ENGLISH 29

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 29 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
INSTALLATION/CONNECTION
Warning Part list for installation
• The unit can only be used with a 12 V DC power supply, negative ground. (A) Faceplate (×1) (B) Trim plate (×1)
• Disconnect the battery’s negative terminal before wiring and mounting.
• Do not connect Battery wire (yellow) and Ignition wire (red) to the car chassis or Ground wire (black) to
prevent a short circuit.
• To prevent short circuit:
– Insulate unconnected wires with vinyl tape.
– Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. (C) Mounting sleeve (×1) (D) Wiring harness (×1)
– Secure the wires with cable clamps and wrap vinyl tape around the wires that comes into contact with
metal parts to protect the wires.

Caution
• For safety’s sake, leave wiring and mounting to professionals. Consult the car audio dealer.
• Install this unit in the console of your vehicle. Do not touch the metal parts of this unit during and shortly (E) Extraction key (×2) (F) Screws
after use of the unit. Metal parts such as the heat sink and enclosure become hot. M5 × 7 mm (×4)
• Do not connect the wires of speakers to the car chassis or Ground wire (black), or connect them in
parallel. M5 × 6 mm (×4)
• Mount the unit at an angle of less than 30°. M4 × 8 mm (×1)
• If your vehicle wiring harness does not have the ignition terminal, connect Ignition wire (red) to the
terminal on the vehicle’s fuse box which provides 12 V DC power supply and is turned on and off by the
ignition key. Basic procedure
• Keep all cables away from heat dissipate metal parts. 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch, then disconnect the terminal of
• After the unit is installed, check whether the brake lamps, blinkers, wipers, etc. on the car are working the car battery.
properly. 2 Connect the wires properly.
• If the fuse blows, first make sure the wires are not touching car’s chassis, then replace the old fuse with See “Wiring connection” on page 32.
one that has the same rating. 3 Install the unit to your car.
See “Installing the unit (in-dash mounting)” on page 31.
4 Connect the terminal of the car battery.
5 Press B SRC to turn on the power.
6 Detach the faceplate and reset the unit within 5 seconds. (Page 3)

30 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 30 7/19/2018 10:16:53 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
INSTALLATION/CONNECTION
Installing the unit (in-dash mounting) Installing the unit (without mounting sleeve)
1 Remove the mounting sleeve and trim plate from the unit.
2 Align the holes in the unit (on both sides) with the vehicle mounting bracket and
secure the unit with screws (supplied).

Use only the specified screws. Using wrong screws might damage the unit.
Do the required wiring.
(Page 32) Removing the unit
1 Detach the faceplate.
2 Remove the trim plate.
3 Insert the extraction keys deeply into the slots on each side, then follow the arrows
as shown on the illustration.

Hook on the top side

Orientate the trim Dashboard of your car
plate as illustrated
before fitting.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly

in place.

ENGLISH 31

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 31 7/19/2018 10:16:54 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
INSTALLATION/CONNECTION
Wiring connection
IMPORTANT
We recommend installing the unit with a commercially available custom wiring harness specific
for your car and leave this job to professionals for your safety. Consult your car audio dealer.

Fuse (10 A) Antenna terminal

White
To front speaker (left)/ If no connections are made, do not let the wire come out from the tab.
For 3-way crossover: Mid range speaker (left) White/Black
Gray
To front speaker (right)/ Brown
Gray/Black To connect the KENWOOD navigation system, refer your
For 3-way crossover: Mid range speaker (right) (Mute control wire) navigation manual
Green
To rear speaker (left)/
For 3-way crossover: Tweeter (left) Green/Black
Purple Blue/White To the power control terminal when using the optional
To rear speaker (right)/ power amplifier or to the antenna control terminal in the
For 3-way crossover: Tweeter (right) Purple/Black (Power control wire/ vehicle
Antenna control wire)
(12 V 350 mA)

Ignition switch Car fuse box

Red (Ignition wire)
Light blue/yellow
To the steering wheel remote control adapter
Yellow (Battery wire) (Steering remote control wire)
Car fuse
box
Black (Ground wire)
Battery To the metallic body or chassis of the car

32 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 32 7/19/2018 10:16:54 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
INSTALLATION/CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS
Connecting external components FM Frequency Range 87.5 MHz — 108.0 MHz (50 kHz step)
Usable Sensitivity 8.2 dBf (0.71 μV/75 Ω)
(S/N = 30 dB)
Quieting Sensitivity 17.2 dBf (2.0 μV/75 Ω)
(DIN S/N = 46 dB)
Frequency Response (±3 dB) 30 Hz — 15 kHz
Microphone input jack (page 12) Signal-to-Noise Ratio (MONO) 64 dB
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) 40 dB
AM Frequency Range Band 1 (MW) 531 kHz — 1 602 kHz

Tuner
(9 kHz step)
Band 2 (SW1) 2 940 kHz — 7 735 kHz
(5 kHz step)
Output terminals Band 3 (SW2) 9 500 kHz — 10 135 kHz/
When connecting to an external amplifier, connect its ground wire to the car’s 11 580 kHz — 18 135 kHz
chassis to avoid damaging the unit. (5 kHz step)
Channel Space Selection Band 1 9 kHz
Band 2/ 3 5 kHz
Usable Sensitivity MW 29 dBμ (28.2 μV)
(S/N = 20 dB)
SW 30 dBμ (32 μV)

Rear/Front/Subwoofer output Rear/Subwoofer output

For 3-way crossover: For 3-way crossover: Woofer output
Tweeter/Mid Range/Woofer output

ENGLISH 33

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft.indd 33 7/19/2018 10:16:54 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS

USB Standard USB 1.1, USB 2.0 (Full speed) Maximum Output Power 50 W × 4
File System FAT12/16/32 Full Bandwidth Power 22 W × 4
(at less than 1 % THD)
Maximum Supply Current DC 5 V 1.5 A
Speaker Impedance 4Ω—8Ω
Frequency Response (±1 dB) 20 Hz — 20 kHz
Tone Action Band 1: 62.5 Hz ±9 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 99 dB (1 kHz)
Band 2: 100 Hz ±9 dB
Dynamic Range 93 dB Band 3: 160 Hz ±9 dB
USB

Channel Separation 89 dB Band 4: 250 Hz ±9 dB

Band 5: 400 Hz ±9 dB
MP3 Decode Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3 Band 6: 630 Hz ±9 dB

Audio
WMA Decode Compliant with Windows Media Audio Band 7: 1 kHz ±9 dB
Band 8: 1.6 kHz ±9 dB
AAC Decode AAC-LC “.aac”, “.m4a” files Band 9: 2.5 kHz ±9 dB
WAV Decode Linear-PCM Band 10: 4 kHz ±9 dB
Band 11: 6.3 kHz ±9 dB
FLAC Decode FLAC file (Up to 96 kHz/24 bit) Band 12: 10 kHz ±9 dB
Band 13: 16 kHz ±9 dB
Frequency Response (±3 dB) 20 Hz — 20 kHz
Auxiliary

Preout Level/Load :
Input Maximum Voltage 1 000 mV 4 000 mV/10 kΩ load
Input Impedance 30 kΩ :
USB: 2 500 mV/10 kΩ load
Version Bluetooth 3.0
Preout Impedance ≤ 600 Ω
Frequency Range 2.402 GHz — 2.480 GHz
RF Output Power (E.I.R.P.) +4 dBm (MAX), Power Class 2 Operating Voltage 12 V DC car battery
Bluetooth

General
Maximum Communication Range Line of sight approx. 10 m (32.8 ft) Installation Size (W × H × D) 182 mm × 53 mm × 100 mm
Profile HFP 1.6 (Hands-Free Profile) Net Weight (includes Trimplate, 0.6 kg
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Mounting Sleeve)
AVRCP 1.5 (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)
PBAP (Phonebook Access Profile) Subject to change without notice.
SPP (Serial Port Profile)

34 ENGLISH

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_1st Draft_Running.indd 34 9/5/2018 3:17:25 PM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
libFLAC • Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Copyright (C) 2000-2009 Josh Coalson Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright (C) 2011-2013 Xiph.Org Foundation • Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
that the following conditions are met: performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product
following disclaimer. may affect wireless performance.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and • Apple, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. the U.S. and other countries.
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to • IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY • SPOTIFY and the Spotify logo are among the registered trademarks of Spotify AB.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF • Android is a trademark of Google LLC.
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL • The “AAC” logo is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, • The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) those of their respective owners.
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

ENGLISH 35

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_EN20.indd 35 5/11/2021 12:03:56 PM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Article 4 Right pertaining to the Licensed Software
The software embedded in the Product (hereinafter the "Licensed Software") provided by Licensor is Any and all copyrights and other rights pertaining to the Licensed Software and related documents
copyrighted to or sublicensable by the Licensor, and this Agreement provides for the terms and conditions shall belong to the Licensor or the original holder of the right who granted to the Licensor the license or
which Users shall follow in order to use the Licensed Software. sublicense for the Licensed Software (hereinafter the "Original Rightholder"), and the User shall not be
The User shall use the Licensed Software by agreeing with the terms of this Software License Agreement. entitled to any right other than the license granted hereunder, in respect of the Licensed Software and any
This Agreement shall be deemed completed at the time the User (hereinafter the "User") initially used the related documents.
Product in which the "Licensed Software" is embedded.
Article 5 Indemnification of Licensor
The Licensed Software may include the software which has been licensed to the Licensor directly or
indirectly from any third party. In such case, some third parties require the Users to follow their conditions 1. Neither the Licensor nor the Original Rightholder shall be liable for any damage incurred by the User
for use separately from this Software License Agreement. Such software shall not be subject to this or any third party due to the exercise of the license granted to the User under this Agreement, unless
Agreement, and the Users are urged to read the "Important Notice concerning the Software" to be provided otherwise restricted by law.
separately below. 2. The Licensor will offer no guarantee for the merchantability, convertibility and consistency with
certain objective of the Licensed Software.
Article 1 General Provision
Article 6 Liability to Third Party
The Licensor shall grant to the User a non-exclusive and non-transferable (other than the exceptional case
referred to in Article 3, Paragraph 1) licensed to use the Licensed Software within the country of the User. If any dispute has arisen with any third party due to an infringement upon a copyright, patent or any
(the country where the User bought the Product (hereinafter the "Country") other intellectual property right that was caused by the User's use of the Licensed Software, the User shall
settle such dispute at its own cost and hold the Licensor and the Original Rightholder harmless from any
Article 2 License inconvenience it may cause.
1. The license granted under this Agreement shall be the right to use the Licensed Software in the Article 7 Confidentiality
Product.
2. The User shall not duplicate, copy, modify, add, translate or otherwise alter, or lease the Licensed The User shall keep the confidentiality of such portion of the Licensed Software, related documents thereof
Software and any related documents, whether in whole or in part. or any other information to be granted under this Agreement, as well as the conditions of this Agreement
3. The use of the Licensed Software shall be limited to personal purpose, and the Licensed Software shall as has not yet entered the public domain, and shall not disclose or divulge the same to any third party
not be distributed, licensed or sub-licensed whether it is for commercial purpose or not. without approval of the Licensor.
4. The User shall use the Licensed Software according to the directions described in the operation
manual or help file, and is prohibited to use or duplicate any data in a manner violating the Copyright Article 8 Termination
Law or any other laws and regulations by applying whole or a part of the Licensed Software. In case the User falls under any of the events described in the following items, the Licensor may
immediately terminate this Agreement or claim that the User compensates for the damage incurred by the
Article 3 Conditions for Grant of License Licensor due to such event:
1. When the User transfers the Product, it may also transfer the license to use the Licensed Software (1) when the User violated any provision of this Agreement; or
embedded in the Product (including any related materials, updates and upgrades) on condition that (2) when a petition has been filed against the User for an attachment,
no original, copies or related materials continue in the possession of the User, and that the User shall provisional attachment, provisional disposition or any other compulsory execution.
cause the transferee to comply with this Software License Agreement.
2. The User shall not carry out reverse engineering, disassembling, decompiling or any other code Article 9 Destruction of the Licensed Software
analysis works in connection with the Licensed Software. If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to the provision of Article 8, the User shall destroy the Licensed
Software, any related documents and copies thereof within two (2) weeks from such date of termination.
i

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_C00.indd i Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 7/19/2018 10:20:49 AM

Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
Article 10 Protection of Copyright Important Notice concerning the Software
1. The copyright and all the other intellectual property rights -jansson
relating to the Licensed Software shall belong to the Licensor Copyright (c) 2009-2012 Petri Lehtinen <[email protected]>
and the Original Rightholder, and in no event shall they be
under the ownership of the User. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
2. The User shall, whenever it uses the Licensed Software, to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/
comply with any laws relating to the copyright and other or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
intellectual property rights. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
Article 11 Export Restriction
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
1. It is prohibited to export the Licensed Software and any BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
related documents outside the country of the User (including IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
transmission thereof outside the country of the User via
Internet of other communication tools). -cJSON
2. The User shall understand that the Licensed Software shall be Copyright (c) 2009 Dave Gamble
subject to the export restrictions adopted by the country of
User and any other countries. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
3. The User shall agree that the software will be subject to any to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/
and all applicable international and domestic laws (including or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
the export control regulation of the country of User and The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
any other countries, and any restrictions concerning the THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
end-users, the use by end-users and importing countries to be OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
provided by the country of User and any other countries, and BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
any other governmental authorities). IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Article 12 Miscellaneous
-CMP
1. In the event any part of this Agreement is invalidated by The MIT License (MIT)
operation of law, the residual provisions shall continue in Copyright (c) 2014 Charles Gunyon
force.
2. Matters not stipulated in this Agreement or any ambiguity or Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
question raised in the construction of this Agreement shall be to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/
provided or settled upon good-faith consultation between the or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
Licensor and the User. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
3. The Licensor and the User hereby agree that this Agreement THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
is governed by the laws of Japan, and any dispute arising OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
from, and relating to the rights and obligations under, this BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
the Tokyo District Court for its first instance.

ii

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_C00.indd ii Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 7/19/2018 10:20:49 AM

Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft libFLAC
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright (C) 2000-2009 Josh Coalson
• Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically Copyright (C) 2011-2013 Xiph.Org Foundation
to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance that the following conditions are met:
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
may affect wireless performance. following disclaimer.
• Apple, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the U.S. and other countries. the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under - Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to
license. endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
• SPOTIFY and the Spotify logo are among the registered trademarks of Spotify AB. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
• Android is a trademark of Google LLC. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
• The “AAC” logo is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
those of their respective owners. SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

35 ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR20.indd 35 5/11/2021 12:09:22 PM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪) USB 2.0 ،USB 1.1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ 22‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪FAT12/16/32‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ %1‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ±1‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ — ‪ 8‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 99‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ 62.5‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 93‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬

‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ 160‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 89‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 250‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ 400‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ 630‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Windows Media Audio‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WMA‬‬

‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪“.m4a” ،“.aac” AAC-LC‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪AAC‬‬
‫‪ 1.6‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WAV‬‬
‫‪ 2.5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) FLAC‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 24/‬ﺑﺖ(‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪FLAC‬‬
‫‪ 6.3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ±3‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬

‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±9‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪:13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1 000‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ 4 000‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2 500 :USB‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺍﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth 3.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫≥ ‪ 600‬ﺍﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2.402‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ 2.480‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ +4‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮﻱ )‪(E.I.R.P.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ 182‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 53‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 100‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ )‪ 32.8‬ﻗﺪﻡ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹶ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﻃﻮﻝ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬

‫‪) HFP 1.6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬

‫‪ 0.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ )ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪) A2DP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ(‬
‫‪) AVRCP 1.5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PBAP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫‪) SPP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 34‬‬ ‫‪5/9/2018 4:39:03 PM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 0.71) 8.2 dBf‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 75/‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫)‪ 30 = S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ 2.0) 17.2 dBf‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 75/‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺪﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ 46 = DIN S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ 15‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ±3‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ 64‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ 40‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 531‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ —‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(MW) 1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪ 1 602‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫‪ 2 940‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ —‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW1) 2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 7 735‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫‪ 9 500‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ —‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW2) 3‬‬
‫‪ 10 135‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 11 580‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ —‬
‫‪ 18 135‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ 5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪3/2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 29‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻴﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪/‬‬
‫)‪ 28.2‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬ ‫)‪ 20 = S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪SW‬‬
‫)‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬

‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 33‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻔﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻭﺇﻳﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،KENWOOD‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪ 350‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ‬ ‫)‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪32‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 32‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(32‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺛﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 31‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ )×‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )×‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫)ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺿﻔﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ )×‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪ (C‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )×‪(1‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (F‬ﻲﻏﺍﺮﺑ‬ ‫)‪ (E‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ )×‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪(4×) 7 mm × M5‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪(4×) 6 mm × M5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪(1×) 8 mm × M4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.30°‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.32‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 30‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪/‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫”‪“NO PAIR”/“NO ENTRY‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(3‬‬ ‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫”‪“ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫”‪ “ERROR‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫”‪“NO DATA”/“NO INFO‬‬ ‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬

‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺍﻭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫”‪/“HF ERROR XX‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) .[ECHO CANCEL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“BT ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“SWITCHING NG‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻭﺀﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) .(AVRCP‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫”‪“NOT SUPPORT‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 29‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪“UNSUPPORTED‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫”‪.DEVICE‬‬
‫‪ Android‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Android‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪“UNRESPONSIVE‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫•‬
‫”‪.DEVICE‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪“USB HUB IS NOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫”‪.SUPPORTED‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬

‫‪ANDROID‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺴﺤﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .USB‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫”‪ “USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ”‪ “NO DEVICE‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫”‪ “READING‬ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ( ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“USB ERROR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻔﺊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ‪.iPhone/iPod‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﻻ ﺗﺼﻞ‬

‫‪iPod/USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫”‪ • “ANDROID ERROR”/“NO MUSIC‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “LOADING‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .iPhone/iPod‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫”‪“DISCONNECTED‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ )‪ (USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫”‪“NA FILE‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ :USB‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫”‪“CONNECTING‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪.(USB‬‬ ‫”‪“COPY PRO‬‬
‫‪Spotify‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ )‪ ،(USB‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪“NO DEVICE‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”‪“CHECK APP‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ )‪ (USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫”‪“NO MUSIC‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻭﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Spotify‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟـ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫”‪“iPod ERROR‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.iPod‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪28‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 28‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:10 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪BT AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪“MISWIRING CHECK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫”‪.WIRING THEN PWR ON‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪“PROTECTING SEND‬‬
‫”‪.SERVICE‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) .[SOURCE SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(3‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ • .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(5‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪iPod/USB‬‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﻫﺮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ”‪ “READING‬ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )‪.(iPhone/iPod/USB‬‬

‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 27‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪ANDROID‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪/SPOTIFY‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪SPOTIFY BT‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪BT AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،DISP‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪AUX‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “NO TEXT‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “NO INFO‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ( ﺍﻭ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪STANDBY‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪STANDBY‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪RADIO‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪RADIO‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪) Radio Data System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪) Radio Data System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:FLAC/WAV/AAC/WMA/MP3‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:FLAC/WAV/AAC/WMA/MP3‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ANDROID‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [MODE OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(9‬‬ ‫‪iPod BT/iPod USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ SPOTIFY BT/SPOTIFY‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪26‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 26‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪iPhone/iPod‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪Made for‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪ 5th) iPod touch‬ﻭ ‪(6th generation‬‬
‫– ‪(7th generation) iPod nano‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫– ‪X ،8 Plus ،8 ،7 Plus ،7 ،SE ،6S Plus ،6S ،6 Plus ،6 ،5C ،5S ،5 ،iPhone 4S‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺒﺮ ‪:Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻦ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻟﺌﻼ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Made for‬‬
‫– ‪ 5th) iPod touch‬ﻭ ‪(6th generation‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫– ‪X ،8 Plus ،8 ،7 Plus ،7 ،SE ،6S Plus ،6S ،6 Plus ،6 ،5C ،5S ،5 ،iPhone 4S‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪ “Videos‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[MODE OFF‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPhone/iPod‬‬ ‫ﻟـ‪ – :‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”‪ “KENWOOD‬ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD‬ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،iPhone/iPod‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫– ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪.<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Android‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android OS 4.1‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺫﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OS 4.1‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪(.flac) FLAC ،(.wav) WAV ،(.m4a) AAC ،(.aac) AAC ،(.wma) WMA ،(.mp3) MP3‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪.Android Open Accessory (AOA) 2.0‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪FAT32 ،FAT16 ،FAT12 :‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ‪ ،AOA 2.0‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ AOA 2.0‬ﻛﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪Spotify‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪.<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‪:‬‬
‫– ‪) 7 Plus ،7 ،SE ،6S Plus ،6S ،6 Plus ،6 ،5C ،5S ،5 ،iPhone 4S‬ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ iOS 8‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫– ‪ 5th) iPod touch‬ﻭ ‪(6th generation‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪.USB‬‬
‫– ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Android OS 4.0.3‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 1.5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Spotify‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<www.spotify.com‬‬

‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 25‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫(‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫]‪[LEVEL METER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪[DISPLAY‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫]‪) [COLOR SELECT‬ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [ALL ZONE‬ﻭ ]‪ [ZONE 1‬ﻭ ]‪ [ZONE 2‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ )]‪) .([ALL ZONE] ،[ZONE 2] ،[ZONE 1‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.23‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/[RED2]/[RED1]/[CUSTOM R/G/B]/[VARIABLE SCAN]/[INITIAL COLOR‬‬
‫]‪/[BLUE1]/[PURPLE4]/[PURPLE3]/[PURPLE2]/[PURPLE1]/[RED3‬‬
‫]‪/[AQUA1]/[LIGHTBLUE]/[SKYBLUE2]/[SKYBLUE1]/[BLUE3]/[BLUE2‬‬
‫]‪/[YELLOWGREEN1]/[GREEN3]/[GREEN2]/[GREEN1]/[AQUA2‬‬
‫]‪[ORANGERED]/[ORANGE2]/[ORANGE1]/[YELLOW]/[YELLOWGREEN2‬‬
‫ﻻﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ .[CUSTOM R/G/B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀﻩ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[CUSTOM R/G/B‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S/T‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )]‪) ([B]/[G]/[R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﻦ ]‪ [0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ ،([9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[DIMMER‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﻔﺊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[DIMMER TIME‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ [6:00PM] :[ON] :‬؛ ]‪[6:00AM] :[OFF‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.23‬‬ ‫]‪[BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫‪ [LVL 00] 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :[LVL 31‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ONCE‬ﻳﻤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫]‪[TEXT SCROLL‬‬
‫)ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 24‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻭ ]‪ [GAIN‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[DTA SETTINGS‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫]‪[SUBWOOFER]/[REAR RIGHT]/[REAR LEFT]/[FRONT RIGHT]/[FRONT LEFT‬‬
‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [REAR LEFT‬ﻭ ]‪ [REAR RIGHT‬ﻭ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫]‪ [NONE‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [REAR‬ﻭ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) .[SPEAKER SIZE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫]‪[WOOFER]/[MID RIGHT]/[MID LEFT]/[TWEETER RIGHT]/[TWEETER LEFT‬‬
‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [WOOFER‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [NONE‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [WOOFER‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪) .[SPEAKER SIZE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [R-SP LOCATION‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ [CAR SETTINGS‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫– ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [NONE‬ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [REAR‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) .[SPEAKER SIZE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻭ ]‪ [GAIN‬ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[DTA SETTINGS‬‬

‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(24‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺪ )ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [GAIN‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [FRONT ALL‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬

‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 23‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫]‪/[80HZ]/[70HZ]/[60HZ]/[50HZ]/[40HZ]/[30HZ‬‬ ‫]‪[HPF FRQ‬‬ ‫]‪[MID RANGE‬‬

‫]‪/[180HZ]/[150HZ]/[120HZ]/[100HZ]/[90HZ‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫]‪[THROUGH]/[250HZ]/[220HZ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[–12DB]/[–6DB‬‬ ‫]‪[HPF SLOPE‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻭ ]‪ [GAIN‬ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫]‪ “[DTA SETTINGS‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.23‬‬ ‫]‪/[5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[1KHZ‬‬ ‫]‪[LPF FRQ‬‬
‫]‪[THROUGH]/[12.5KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[6.3KHZ‬‬
‫]‪[DTA SETTINGS‬‬ ‫]‪[–12DB]/[–6DB‬‬ ‫]‪[LPF SLOPE‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[POSITION‬‬ ‫]‪(0°) [NORMAL]/(180°) [REVERSE‬‬ ‫]‪[PHASE‬‬
‫]‪ :[ALL‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ؛ ]‪ :[FRONT RIGHT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ ؛‬ ‫]‪ [–8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[0‬‬ ‫]‪[GAIN‬‬
‫]‪ :[FRONT LEFT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ؛ ]‪ :[FRONT ALL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [FRONT ALL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[2-WAY X’OVER‬‬ ‫]‪/[80HZ]/[70HZ]/[60HZ]/[50HZ]/[40HZ]/[30HZ‬‬ ‫]‪[LPF FRQ‬‬ ‫]‪2*[WOOFER‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫]‪/[180HZ]/[150HZ]/[120HZ]/[100HZ]/[90HZ‬‬
‫]‪[THROUGH]/[250HZ]/[220HZ‬‬
‫]‪ [0CM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :[610CM‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[DISTANCE‬‬
‫]‪[–12DB]/[–6DB‬‬ ‫]‪[SLOPE‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫]‪(0°) [NORMAL]/(180°) [REVERSE‬‬ ‫]‪[PHASE‬‬
‫]‪ [–8DB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :[0DB‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫]‪[GAIN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫]‪ [–8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[0‬‬ ‫]‪[GAIN‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SWITCH PREOUT‬ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪.[SUB-W‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻭ ]‪ ([GAIN‬ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[POSITION‬‬ ‫]‪[DTA RESET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET‬ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪) .[ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪[CAR SETTINGS‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[DTA SETTINGS‬‬
‫]‪/[SUV]/[MINIVAN]/[WAGON]/[FULL SIZE CAR]/[COMPACT‬‬ ‫]‪[CAR TYPE‬‬
‫])‪ :[MINIVAN(LONG‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[R-SP LOCATION‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[REAR DECK]/[DOOR‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[CAR TYPE‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [COMPACT‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [FULL SIZE CAR‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[WAGON‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.[SUV‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[3RD ROW]/[2ND ROW‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫]‪ [CAR TYPE‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [MINIVAN‬ﺃﻭ ])‪.[MINIVAN(LONG‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪22‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 22‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
/[70HZ]/[60HZ]/[50HZ]/[40HZ]/[30HZ] [SW LPF FRQ] 2*1*[SUBWOOFER LPF] ‫ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬2 ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬
/[150HZ]/[120HZ]/[100HZ]/[90HZ]/[80HZ]
[THROUGH]/[250HZ]/[220HZ]/[180HZ] [SPEAKER SIZE]
[–24DB]/[–18DB]/[–12DB]/[–6DB] [SW LPF SLOPE] /[17CM]/[16CM]/[13CM]/[12CM]/[10CM]/[8CM] [SIZE] [FRONT]
[7×10]/[6×9]/[6×8]/[5×7]/[4×6]/[18CM]
(0°) [NORMAL]/(180°) [REVERSE] [SW LPF PHASE]
‫[ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬NONE]/[LARGE]/[MIDDLE]/[SMALL] [TWEETER]
[0] ‫–[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬8] [SW LPF GAIN]
(‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
/[4×6]/[18CM]/[17CM]/[16CM]/[13CM]/[12CM]/[10CM]/[8CM] [REAR]
‫ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬3 ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬ (‫[ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬7×10]/[NONE]/[6×9]/[6×8]/[5×7]

[SPEAKER SIZE] ‫[ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬NONE]/[38CM OVER]/[30CM]/[25CM]/[20CM]/[16CM] 2*1*[SUBWOOFER]

(‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
[LARGE]/[MIDDLE]/[SMALL] [TWEETER]
[X ' OVER]
/[18CM]/[17CM]/[16CM]/[13CM]/[12CM]/[10CM]/[8CM] [MID RANGE]
[6×9]/[6×8]/[5×7]/[4×6] /[5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[1KHZ] [FRQ] [TWEETER]
[12.5KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[6.3KHZ]
‫[ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬NONE]/[38CM OVER]/[30CM]/[25CM]/[20CM]/[16CM] 2*[WOOFER]
(‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ [0] ‫–[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬8] [GAIN LEFT]
[X ' OVER] [0] ‫–[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬8] [GAIN RIGHT]
/[5KHZ]/[4KHZ]/[2.5KHZ]/[1.6KHZ]/[1KHZ] [HPF FRQ] [TWEETER] /[70HZ]/[60HZ]/[50HZ]/[40HZ]/[30HZ] [F-HPF FRQ] [FRONT HPF]
[12.5KHZ]/[10KHZ]/[8KHZ]/[6.3KHZ] /[150HZ]/[120HZ]/[100HZ]/[90HZ]/[80HZ]
[250HZ]/[THROUGH]/[220HZ]/[180HZ]
[–12DB]/[–6DB] [SLOPE]
[–24DB]/[–18DB]/[–12DB]/[–6DB] [F-HPF SLOPE]
(0°) [NORMAL]/(180°) [REVERSE] [PHASE]
[0] ‫–[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬8] [F-HPF GAIN]
[0] ‫–[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬8] [GAIN]
[R-HPF FRQ] [REAR HPF]
22 ‫ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬: 2* ،1* .‫[ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‬FRONT HPF] ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ [R-HPF SLOPE]
[R-HPF GAIN]

21 ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 21 15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM
Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SOUND EFFECT‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ RADIO‬ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(.AUX‬‬ ‫]‪[SOUND RECNSTR‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪SPEAKER SIZE‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(.RADIO‬‬ ‫]‪[SPACE ENHANCE‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [NONE‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[SPEAKER SIZE‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[X ‘ OVER‬‬ ‫]‪ :[LRG]/[MED]/[SML‬ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[LV3]/[LV2]/[LV1‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪[SND REALIZER‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [TWEETER‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[SUBWOOFER]/[REAR]/[FRONT‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪[WOOFER] :‬‬
‫]‪ :[HI]/[MID]/[LOW‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[STAGE EQ‬‬
‫‪) X ‘ OVER‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[LPF FRQ]/[HPF FRQ]/[SW LPF FRQ]/[R-HPF FRQ]/[F-HPF FRQ]/[FRQ‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫]‪[DRIVE EQ‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪:[LPF SLOPE]/[HPF SLOPE]/[SW LPF SLOPE]/[R-HPF SLOPE]/[F-HPF SLOPE]/[SLOPE‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ“ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪[SPEAKER SIZE‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(5‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [THROUGH‬ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ“‪(.‬‬ ‫]‪[X ‘ OVER‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[PHASE]/[SW LPF PHASE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[GAIN]/[SW LPF GAIN]/[R-HPF GAIN]/[F-HPF GAIN]/[GAIN RIGHT]/[GAIN LEFT‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ“ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫]‪[DTA SETTINGS‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22‬‬ ‫]‪[CAR SETTINGS‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET]/[SUB-W LEVEL‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SWITCH PREOUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) .[SUB-W‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(4‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [SUB-W LEVEL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[ON‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 20‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [USER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[PRESET EQ‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪.[EASY EQ‬‬
‫]‪ [LEVEL –9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([LEVEL 0]) [LEVEL +9‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪[LEVEL‬‬ ‫]‪[62.5HZ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON] [BASS EXTEND‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [LEVEL –9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([LEVEL 0]) [LEVEL +9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫]‪/[160HZ]/[100HZ‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪/[400HZ]/[250HZ‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬ ‫]‪/[1KHZ]/[630HZ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫]‪/[2.5KHZ]/[1.6KHZ‬‬
‫]‪/[6.3KHZ]/[4KHZ‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫]‪[16KHZ]/[10KHZ‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ AUD‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J/K‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENT IW‬‬
‫]‪ :[2.00]/[1.50]/[1.35‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[Q FACTOR‬‬
‫]‪/[JAZZ]/[TOP40]/[EASY]/[POPS]/[ROCK]/[NATURAL‬‬ ‫]‪[PRESET EQ‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎ ﹺﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫]‪ :[USER]/[POWERFUL‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﹸ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [USER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ [EASY EQ‬ﺍﻭ ]‪(.[MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫]‪[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫]‪ [LV1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :[LV5‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[BASS BOOST‬‬
‫]‪ [LEVEL –50] [SUB-W LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([LEVEL 0]) [LEVEL +10‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫]‪ :[LV2]/[LV1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫]‪[LOUDNESS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬؛‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[EASY EQ‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [USER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[PRESET EQ‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SUBWOOFER SET‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪.[MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫]‪[FADER‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[LEVEL 0] :‬‬ ‫]‪ [LEVEL –50] :[SW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[LEVEL +10‬‬
‫]‪ [R15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([0]) [F15‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[LEVEL 0‬‬ ‫]‪ [LEVEL –9] :[BASS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[LEVEL +9‬‬
‫]‪[LEVEL 0‬‬ ‫]‪ [LEVEL –9] :[MID‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[LEVEL +9‬‬
‫]‪ [L15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([0]) [R15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[BALANCE‬‬
‫]‪([LEVEL 0‬‬ ‫]‪ [LEVEL –9] :[TRE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[LEVEL +9‬‬
‫]‪ [–15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([0]) [+6‬ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫]‪[VOLUME OFFSET‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.FM‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 19‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:11 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫(‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.iPod BT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) .USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ،iPod BT‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ iPod USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ iPod BT‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻻ ﺯﺍﻝ‬ ‫]‪[REMOTE APP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )‪ IOS‬ﺍﻭ ‪ (ANDROID‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SELECT‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫]‪[IOS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .USB‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،IOS‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪) iPod BT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod USB‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺫﺍ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod BT‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪/iPod touch/iPhone :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Android‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Android‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪.iPod BT‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ Android‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .Bluetooth‬؛‬ ‫]‪[ANDROID‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪Spotify‬‬ ‫]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪ *[ANDROID LIST‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ Android‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪ [SPOTIFY SRC‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) .[SOURCE SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[STATUS‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[IOS CONNECTED‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪/iPhone‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) .Bluetooth‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬ ‫‪ iPod‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SPOTIFY‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ (iPod/iPhone‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫]‪ :[IOS NOT CONNECTED‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ IOS‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ANDROID CONNECTED‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪) SPOTIFY BT‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.(Android‬‬
‫‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ANDROID NOT CONNECTED‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Spotify‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10‬‬
‫* ]‪ [ANDROID‬ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪ [SELECT‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪.[YES‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪18‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 18‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ — BLUETOOTH‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪[RANDOM OFF].‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ ،BT AUDIO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪*.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫* ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”‪) Play‬ﻋﺮﺽ(“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.BT AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ BT AUDIO‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪KENWOOD Remote‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪KENWOOD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENT IW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.6 IW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪.#FM+/ AM‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪/1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “R.APP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.S / T (+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.S / T‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪.S / T (+‬‬ ‫‪.S / T‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪.<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬ ‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫]‪،[ALL REPEAT‬‬
‫]‪،[FILE REPEAT‬‬
‫]‪[REPEAT OFF‬‬

‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 17‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫]‪[INITIALIZE‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”‪ “PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE PIN 0000‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )” ‪/“KMM-BT3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫” ‪ (“KMM-BT2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[BT MODE‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “TESTING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪*[PHONE SELECT‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ” “ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (NG‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ” “ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪*[AUDIO SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :PAIRING‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪[DEVICE DELETE‬‬
‫‪ :HF CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AUD CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [YES‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[NO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬ ‫‪:PB DL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[PIN CODE EDIT‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(0000‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫]‪[RECONNECT‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ )‪/iPhone‬‬ ‫]‪[AUTO PAIRING‬‬
‫‪ (iPod touch‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪16‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 16‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪(.PBAP‬‬ ‫]‪[PHONE BOOK‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )‪.(ABCDEFGHIJK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪ LMNOPQRSTUV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(WXYZ1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2 / 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،S / T‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “1‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ” “ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [PHONE BOOK‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) HM :‬ﻣﻨﺰﻝ(‪) OF ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ(‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫]‪ ،[NUMBER DIAL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) MO‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻝ(‪) OT ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ(‪) GE ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻜﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﹸ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ “Ú‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ”‪(.“U‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ‪،‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫]‪[NUMBER DIAL‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪ “STORED‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.(+ ،#‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [NUMBER DIAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫]‪[VOICE‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO MEMORY‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‪(.‬‬
‫]‪ :[FULL]/[MID]/[LOW‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪*.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MAX]/[MID]/[LOW]/[NO SIGNAL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪*.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 15‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪...‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ(“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ(“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫]‪ [–10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([–4]) [+10‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[MIC GAIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [–5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([0]) [+5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫]‪[NR LEVEL‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪ [–5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ :([0]) [+5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫]‪[ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪(.PBAP‬‬ ‫]‪[CALL HISTORY‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “I‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “O‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[SETTINGS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ NUMBER‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(NAME‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUTO ANSWER‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO DATA‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [01‬ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪ ،[30‬ﺍﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [OFF‬ﻻﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪) .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪([OFF] :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪14‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 14‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫(‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬ ‫– ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫– ]‪ [AUTO PAIRING‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) .[ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪...‬‬ ‫‪ — BLUETOOTH‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪...‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪2*VOL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ*‪1‬‬
‫‪ VOL‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫]‪ [00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [35‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪([15] :‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺊ ‪ ZONE 2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪ [AUTO ANSWER‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6 IW‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ*‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ZONE 1‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[DISPLAY‬‬ ‫•‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (24‬ﻭﻳﻀﺎﺀ ‪ ZONE 2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ VOL‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 3‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 13‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ — BLUETOOTH‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(AVRCP‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪(SPP‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )” ‪/“KMM-BT3‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬
‫” ‪ (“KMM-BT2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫”‪” “PASS XXXXXX” “PAIRING‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ“ ”‪“PRESS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫”‪ “VOLUME KNOB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )‪(SBC‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫– ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(AAC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )‪ (PIN‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “PAIRING OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “BT1‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺍﻭ ”‪ “BT2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “BT1‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺍﻭ ”‪ “BT2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )‪.(SSP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ]‪ [DEVICE DELETE‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.16‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ ،BT AUDIO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(17‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻣﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 12‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫‪Spotify‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENT IW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.6 IW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Spotify‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J / K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.S*3 / T (+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.S*3 / T‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪.#FM+/ AM‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪/1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ*‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪5‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫]‪،3*[REPEAT ONE] ،[REPEAT ALL‬‬
‫]‪[REPEAT OFF‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ *‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ*‪5‬‬
‫]‪[SHUFFLE OFF] ،[SHUFFLE ON‬‬

‫*‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫*‪ 4‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪...Spotify‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “SAVED‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ”‪) Your Music‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ(“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪) Your Library‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ(“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Spotify‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “REMOVED‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ”‪) Your Music‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ(“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪) Your Library‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ(“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Spotify‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 11‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫‪Spotify‬‬ ‫‪ANDROID/iPod/USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) USB‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ( ﺍﻭ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) .5‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(.BT AUDIO‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )‪ ،(iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Spotify‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪ [SPOTIFY SRC‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) .[SOURCE SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.DIRECT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Spotify‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod USB‬ﻭ ‪.ANDROID‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪) KCA-iP103/KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(*‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪2*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.SPOTIFY‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫]‪ :[DRIVE CHANGE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )]‪ [DRIVE 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫]‪[MUSIC DRIVE‬‬
‫*‪ :KCA-iP102 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺑﻮﺱ‪ : KCA-iP103 ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫]‪ ([DRIVE 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫]‪[SKIP SEARCH‬‬
‫]‪ :[10%]/[5%]/[1%]/[0.5%‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod USB‬ﺃﻭ )ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ،(iPod BT‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 10‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫‪ANDROID/iPod/USB‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪) iPod USB‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ ،(iPod BT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE ON‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )‪.(Mass Storage Class‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE OFF‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪KENWOOD Remote‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪KENWOOD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،iPod‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[MODE OFF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) iPod/iPhone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﺍﻭ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪) Android‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “R.APP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪ iPod USB‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪(iPod BT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪.<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) .Bluetooth‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(17‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ S / T‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%10‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪TuneIn Radio Pro/TuneIn Radio‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ iPod USB‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪(iPod BT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ TuneIn Radio‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،TuneIn Radio Pro‬ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ” “ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻭ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.9‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫*‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 9‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:12 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫‪ANDROID/iPod/USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ANDROID/iPod USB/USB :‬‬
‫‪ANDROID/USB :‬‬

‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENT IW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.6 IW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ*‪4‬‬
‫)‪.S / T (+‬‬ ‫‪.S / T‬‬
‫‪) CA-U1EX‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪(500 mA :.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.S / T (+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.S / T‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪.#FM+/ AM‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪/1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ*‪5‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪6*4‬‬ ‫‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫]‪ : [ALL REPEAT]/[FOLDER REPEAT]/[FILE REPEAT‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/WMA/MP3‬‬
‫‪FLAC/WAV/AAC‬‬
‫]‪iPod : [REPEAT OFF]/[FOLDER REPEAT]/[FILE REPEAT‬‬ ‫‪KCA-iP103/KCA-iP102‬‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(*‪ 1‬ﺍﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ*‪6*4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪2*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫]‪ : [RANDOM OFF]/[FOLDER RANDOM‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/WAV/AAC/WMA/MP3‬‬
‫‪ FLAC‬ﺃﻭ ‪iPod‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[ALL RANDOM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3*ANDROID‬‬

‫‪ :KCA-iP102‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺑﻮﺱ‪ : KCA-iP103 ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫*‪1‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫*‪3‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪2*USB‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ANDROID‬‬ ‫*‪4‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪.ANDROID/iPod‬‬ ‫*‪5‬‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) .[MODE OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬ ‫*‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪8‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 8‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫]‪[TI‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪ [BUILT-IN AUX‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) .[SOURCE SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ .(“TI‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫]‪[PTY SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪/[FRENCH]/[ENGLISH]) PTY‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،([GERMAN‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪[CLOCK‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[TIME SYNC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PTY SEARCH]/[TI]/[AF SET]/[REGIONAL]/[NEWS SET]/[MONO SET‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ FM3/FM2/FM1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪) “L‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪[PTY SEARCH‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) ،[AFFAIRS] ،[NEWS] :[SPEECH‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ]‪،[DRAMA] ،[EDUCATE] ،[SPORT] ،[INFO‬‬
‫]‪،[CHILDREN] ،[FINANCE] ،[WEATHER] ،[VARIED] ،[SCIENCE] ،[CULTURE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪AUX‬‬ ‫]‪[DOCUMENT] ،[LEISURE] ،[TRAVEL] ،[PHONE IN] ،[RELIGION] ،[SOCIAL‬‬
‫]‪) :[MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪) ،[POP M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪) ،[ROCK M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪،[EASY M‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪) ،[CLASSICS] ،[LIGHT M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪،[COUNTRY] ،[JAZZ] ،[OTHER M‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪) ،[OLDIES] ،[NATION M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ]‪[FOLK M‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[SYSTEM‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUX NAME SET‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺗﺤﺖ ]‪ [SPEECH‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MUSIC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [AUX‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪[TV]/[VIDEO]/[GAME]/[PORTABLE]/[DVD]/‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 7‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ”‪ “ST‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺚ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ FM‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺚ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬

‫]‪[TUNER SETTING‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.RADIO‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ S / T‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SEEK MODE‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ BAND‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪ #FM+/*AM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO1‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[AUTO2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.SW2/SW1/AM/FM3/FM2/FM1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[MANUAL‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) S / T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ S / T (+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ SW2/SW1/AM‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪[LOCAL SEEK‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻭ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪.SW2/SW1/AM‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[AUTO MEMORY‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [NORMAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪) .[PRESET TYPE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬

‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﻩ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪[MONO SET‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DIRECT‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫]‪[NEWS SET‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪.DIRECT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫]‪[REGIONAL‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ”‪ .“AF‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫]‪[AF SET‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Radio Data System‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺊ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 6‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[FACTORY RESET‬‬ ‫]‪[DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ(‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫]‪[EASY MENU‬‬
‫]‪[CLOCK‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ]‪...[FUNCTION‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ]‪ [ZONE 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬؛‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫]‪[CLOCK DISPLAY‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ]‪ [ZONE 1‬ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ]‪.[COLOR SELECT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [FUNCTION‬ﻭﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫]‪[ENGLISH‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﺀﺓ ]‪ [ZONE 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،[FUNCTION‬ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EASY MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[ENGLISH‬‬ ‫]‪[TURKCE‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 23‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫]‪[PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫)‪ .(SW2/SW1/AM/FM3/FM2/FM1‬؛ ]‪ :[MIX‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC B‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.STANDBY‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫]‪[SYSTEM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪ [X’OVER‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪(.[2WAY‬‬ ‫]‪[KEY BEEP‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “2WAY‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ،“3WAY‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪ [X’OVER‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪(.[2WAY‬‬ ‫]‪[TDF ALARM‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “YES‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ،“NO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ACC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OFF‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SOURCE SELECT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ SPOTIFY BT/SPOTIFY‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫]‪[SPOTIFY SRC‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ AUX‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(7‬‬ ‫]‪[BUILT-IN AUX‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33 ،32‬‬ ‫]‪[F/W UPDATE‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[UPDATE SYSTEM‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬؛ ]‪ :[NO‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫]‪[F/W UP xxxx‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ >‪.<www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 5‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK FORMAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [12H‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[24H‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[DATE FORMAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [DD/MM/YY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[MM/DD/YY‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﻟﻎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[DATE SET‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [FACTORY RESET‬ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪ ،[YES‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(5‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪“VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS” “SEL LANGUAGE” :‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [ENG‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[TUR‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [ENG‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.“VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS” “CANCEL DEMO” :‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [YES‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.STANDBY‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DEMO OFF‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ “2-WAY X ’OVER” :‬ﺃﻭ ”‪“3-WAY X ’OVER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪[XX] :‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪ [X’OVER‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫]‪[SWITCH PREOUT‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK ADJUST‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) (.[2WAY‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫]‪ :[SUB-W]/[REAR‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 4‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫(‬ ‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪) (RC-406‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬

‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻝ‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B SRC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫) ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪( .‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.VOL‬‬ ‫‪ VOL‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ VOL‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ATT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISP‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 3‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:13 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻤﻌﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﻟﻎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻮﻗﹼﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺃﺑﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪ANDROID/iPod/USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪Spotify‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(3‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(32‬ﺍﻃﻔﺊ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ STANDBY‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪:(RC-406‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻻﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) .[FUNCTION‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫•‬
‫]‪ [XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Data Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_AR.indd 2‬‬ ‫‪15/8/2018 11:16:14 AM‬‬
‫‪Book Size:‬‬ ‫)‪B6L (182 mm x 128 mm‬‬
KMM-BT305
KMM-BT205
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬

JS_KWD_KMM_BT305_MN_C20.indd 2 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/3/2021 4:58:51 PM

Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)